Home

Pioneer AVIC-Z2 Operation Manual

1. The Emergency Info screen is only intended to provide information to a driver that may be useful during an emergency situation and if they are in a safe location If not or in all major accidents call 911 directly 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Emergency Info 2 Touch Locate Car Service Personal information VIN AAA BBB COC Vou are currently at CA H0 N PASADENA F Wwy Policy number AAA B88 CCC W Lon 18 B412 N Lat 34 4544 Insurance phone 4 114 222 3333 Emergency TOW service phone 1 066 228 8882 For non tow omer gencies dial 911 Selup Locate Car Service Zz back A list of auto services appears onscreen 3 Touch the Category of the auto service you want to use a aa Locate Car Service 5 Automotive A Car Deater The Auto Service categories that can be selected in the Emergency Info are Auto motive and Car Dealer Select All Selects all detailed categories included in that category A red check appears next to the selected category Deselect All Cancels the selected detailed categories Select Detail Selects a detailed category from the list O If you want to search with more detailed categories touch Select Detail When the subcategory list appears touch the item and touch Back When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected blue check marks will appear Repeat Step 3 and 4 sel
2. You can select whether to display or hide the 3D Landmark on the map gt 3D Landmark gt Page 48 40 Vehicle Dynamics Display ndicates the status of your vehicle A CAUTION e In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode the speedometer display may show a dif ferent speed than your vehicle s actual speedometer because your unit measures speed in a different way O You can change the items indicated on the left and right meters gt Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display gt Page 80 Rear View Rear view image is displayed on the left hand side of the screen while the map of your sur roundings is indicated on the right 2 10 20 1 TE HN a 8 21 7 O Ifthe Camera Input is set to Off the rear view image is not displayed Please set it to On D Setting for rear view camera Page 156 O When using a camera set to turn On Off in conjunction with the reverse signal no cam era images will be displayed in rear view mode while you are moving forward O Ifthe camera is set always On it can display images in rear view mode when the vehicle is moving forward In that case you should ask the camera maker or dealer whether the cam era s functions or lifetime would be affected O Rear View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer as a
3. i 1 Destination history Touch to calculate the route 2 Delete Deletes the selected history 3 Back Returns to the previous screen Deleting the entry in Destination EEEE History Items in the Destination History can be deleted All entries in the Destination History can be deleted at once 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Destination History 2 Touch Delete Delete from History screen appears 3 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion i ELKWOOD ST me fe COHASSET ST me CLYBOURN AVE m E 4TH ST me N HILL ST V N FIGUEROA ST On this screen you can select the following items All Selects all entries None Displayed when all locations are selected Cancels all selected locations 4 Touch Delete 5 Select Yes The data you selected is deleted Alternative option No Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4 O Because deleted data cannot be restored take extra care not to delete by mistake 67 IAWN O e w xo oO suol e007 Buljyipy pue Bunajsibay i IAWN g sajdeyd suo1 90 uipa pue Bulsa sibay 68 Using Traffic Information Using XM NavTraffic Informa tion o the navigation sys scription to XM NavT current traffic conditi em will overlay the t f you have a GEX P10XMT XM Data amp Audio Receiver so Digital
4. touch again in that time You can make a phone call in many different ways 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dial 3 Input the phone number and then touch to make a call Touch to make a call 4 To end the call touch at the top right of the screen O Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed number and received call histories are To cancel the call after the system starts dial recorded automatically When the number ing touch BESE of entries exceeds 30 the entries will be deleted from the oldest one 4 To end the call touch J at the top right You can clear the dialed number or of the screen received call history D Clearing the dialed number or received call history gt Page 92 Q gt ty xo oO Dialing from the dialed number history or the received call history Calling a number in the Phone Book Buiuoygd 2a j spuey Buisp 1 Touch Information in the Navigation After finding the list in the Phone Book you want menu and then touch Phone Menu to call you can select the number and make the i call 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received O Before using this function you need to trans Calls l fer the phone book stored in your cellular The list of either one appears phone to the navigation system 3 Touch a name or telephone number from D Transferring the phone book gt Page 89 the list to make a call Date and
5. 8 Repeat play Each touch of the gts changes the settings as Cc n s a gt gt lt n o i 6 Ww S z i lt o 9 2 S w s 2 a 2 amp follows With some discs the icon may be dis Chapter Repeat Repeat just the current played meaning that the operation is not chapter valid Title Repeat Repeat just the current title 111 mum I Of you perform chapter title search fast for gt Chapter 11 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio ward rewind or slow motion playback the repeat play range changes to off 9 Change the subtitle language Multi sub title Each time you touch Subtitle the DVD switches between subtitle language 10 Change the viewing angle Multi angle Each time you touch Angle the DVD switches between viewing angles O During playback of a scene shot from multiple angles the angle icon is displayed Turn the angle icon display on or off using DVD V Setup menu gt Setting angle icon display gt Page 154 11 Change audio language and audio sys tems Multi audio Each time you touch Audio the DVD switches between audio language and audio system Only digital output of DTS audio is possible If navigation system s optical digital outputs are not connected DTS audio can not be output so select an audio setting other than DTS O Display indications such as Dolby
6. 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Add Wayport List F E MOUNTAIN ST The Select Search Method screen appears After searching for a point display it on a map then touch OK to add to the way points You can add up to five waypoints in total 4 Touch OK A route is recalculated and Route confirma tion screen appears D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 If you set waypoints in the route to your destination the route up to the next way point will appear in light green The rest of the route will appear in light blue Deleting a waypoint You can delete waypoints from the route and then recalculate the route You can delete waypoints successively 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Delete then touch the waypoint you want to delete The touched waypoint will be deleted from the list 4 Touch OK The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 Sorting waypoints You can sort waypoints and recalculate the route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Sort then touch Automatic or Manual a Waypoint List Automa
7. 125 Hz System Settings lets you perform system set up When Preout the subwoofer controller set of different settings for navigation system ting in System Settings menu is Sub w the HPF function is effective for front speak How to view and operate the ers only If you change the acoustic field after you set it System Settings once the high pass filter HPF setting turns Off 1 Press the AV button 7 The Navigation screen changes to the Audio Adjusting source levels source screen of any source Source Level source level adjustment lets you 2 adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching Touch AV Settings The AV Settings screen appears between sources 3 Touch System Settings O Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level which remains unchanged POF Por a Miwa Mema av A 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with Setup pa al ee the level of the source you wish to adjust aT Lovet Jase y 2 Touch Source Level in the Audio Set I N tings menu 3 Touch or to adjust the source vol 4 Touch the item you want to change The setting change screen appears or the set ate ting changes by toggling it 8 to 8 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased Sources are set to same source level adjust p n E ment volume automatically Input j ii CD and ROM MP3 irei XM and SIRIUS TE EXT 1 and EXT 2 AUX an
8. Enter the track edit mode D Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 Areaqry o1snq e2unog Ay ey Buisn AMES Kel fe 127 gum 2 Touch Delete This Track gt lt Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Library 3 Touch Yes Changing the genre of a track 1 Enter the track edit mode D Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Genres 3 Select the desired genre from the list The genre is changed and the system returns to the previous screen Assigning another candidate for title information lf the current title information is not desired title you can search for another title information from Gracenote Database in the hard disk drive man ually and assign another candidate lf there were multiple options for the title informa tion you can select one title from them Music recognition technology and related data are provided by G acenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition echnology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com Once you update the title information the information you edit before will be overwritten by the title information of the Gracenote Database 1 Select the playlist in Albums group and enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Update Title Information search begins When the title
9. O To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to set the sensitivity There are four levels of sensitivity for FM Level 1 2 3 4 The level 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations Operating the Radio AM You can listen to the radio by using the navigation system This section describes operations for Radio AM Selecting AM as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch AM D For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration DD G h Coi 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected 3 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned 4 Preset list display Shows the preset list 5 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch AM to select the radio AM When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys 1 Select a desired frequency from the list Touch to recall the preset frequency O To register the frequency currently being received to the preset list touch and hold the preset list Touch and hold Store broadcast stations You can register the frequency curre
10. Changing the wide screen mode gt Page 155 gt Setting the aspect ratio gt Page 154 A parental lock message is displayed and DVD playback is not possible Parental lock is on Turn parental lock off or change the level Page 155 Parental lock for DVD playback can not be canceled The code number is incorrect Input the correct code number gt Page 155 Playback is not with the audio lan guage and subtitle language settings selected in DVD V Setup The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in DVD V Setup Switching to a selected language is not possible if the language selected in DVD V Setup is not recorded on the disc Dialing is not possible because the touch keys for dialing are inactive Your phone is out of range for serv ice Retry after entering within range for service The connection between cellular phone and the Bluetooth unit sold separately navigation system can not be established now The cellular phone is not registered to the navigation system yet Perform the connection process To use the cellular phone featuring the Bluetooth wireless technology with this navigation system the reg istration process is necessary Messages and How to React to Them Messages for navigation functions The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system O There are occasion
11. My 01 sound vision soul Favorite playlist at Lt A 03 Comming generation O Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one SS My Favorite playlist T LD5 Act as guide The item displayed in blue is the selected play list 123 ges Touch git gt lt Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Library The system enters the playlist edit mode sound vision soul pound vision soul PIONEER TINE Slracks Mbctete PF update fF Aad to Tito My Favorites Sort Pisvisis The Playtest Tracks O To return to the previous screen touch Back Operating the playlist edit mode Album playlist All editing operations are possible The edited contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard disk drive Edit Playlist Albam 1 7 2 oe E 3 Sort Delete Delete Update Add to Piaytests The Playtist Tracks Title My Favorites ce 4 6 0 8 My Mix playlist My Favorite playlist Only 4 6 and 8 can be performed Edit Playlist My Favorites Sort Delete Add to Playlists Tracks My Favorites 4 6 8 1 Enter a desired playlist title D Changing the title of the playlist or track gt Page 125 2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as a voice command for voice recognition D Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name gt Page 1
12. and Favorite location always appear at the top if you registered them O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map gt Address Book Icon gt Page 48 Registering Your Home and Your Favorite Location You can register one home location and one favorite location You can change the registered information later You might find it useful to regis ter your workplace or a relative s home as your favorite location 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Defined Locations 2 Touch Go to When registering your home location touch Home Set Home and Go To 3 Search for a location to register You can select a method of location search Select Search method Biro Bx Search Search aq ty amp Addr ination elephone Vienity ae oe od wet F Waseress Search D Address Search gt Page 28 D Information on searching locations to reg ister gt Page 53 to 58 O If you select Map Search move the scroll cursor to the place you want to set and touch OK 4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you want to register and touch OK The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears 61 IAW Q Hs ty xo p z suo1 907 Buljipy pue Hun azs B y NAVI Chapter 6 Registering and Editing Locations D Editing the entry in Address Book
13. the safe operation of your vehicle Always observe safe driving rules and follow all exist ing traffic regulations If you experience diffi culty in operating the system or reading the Q isplay park you and apply the parki he necessary adjustments instructions ever use this navigation system o route hospitals police stations or similar facilities in an emergency Stop using any functions relat 911 O Route and guidance information displayed by his equipment is for reference purposes o t may not Always he nav advice O Failure to set correct in ocal time may result in the navigation syst providing improper routing and guidance instructions O Nevers em so ic and abled u parking navigat of the p ing to the hands free phone and please ca O The data encoded in the hard disk drive for vehicle in a safe location ng brake before making ever allow others to use the system unless hey have read and understood the operati ng O rictions and advisories currently i orce should always take precedence over guidance given by the navigation system nly accurately reflect the latest permis sible routes road conditions one way stree oad closures or traffic restrictions O Traffic res 2 Ray obey current traffic restrictions even if igation system provides contrary ormation about the em et the volume of your navigation sys high t
14. 1984 200_ by Tele Atlas ALL RIGHTS RESERVED For purpose of any public disclosure provision under any federal state or local law it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commercial product and not subject to disclosure If you are an agency department or other entity of any State government the United States Gov ernment or any other public entity or funded in whole or in part by the United States Govern ment from public disclosure and to con exempt from any statute law regulation or code includi hen you hereby agree to p ng any Sunshine Act Pub otect the Data sider the Data ic Records Act Freedom of Information Act or equivalent which permits public access and or reproduction or use of the Data In the event that such exemption is Cc S hallenged under any such laws this Agreement hall be considered breached and any and all ight to retain any copies or to use of the Data hall be terminated and considered immediately ull and void Any copies of the Data held by you hall immediately be destroyed If any court of ompetent jurisdiction considers this clause void nd unenforceable in whole or in part for any reason this Agreement shall be considered ter minated and null and void in its entirety and any and all copies of the Data shall immediately be destroyed 9OoOnRB Ma 10 8 Additional Provisions with respe
15. Music library will take priority In this case the default voice command will not function To use the default voice command change or delete the registered voice com mand that is identical to the default voice command An Example of Voice Operation Search for POI in vicinity In this example you want to search for the near est gas station and set it as your destination O Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen gt Voice commands related to navigation gt Page 168 1 Press the MAP button to display the navi gation map screen 2 Touch the VOICE icon A list of commands for voice operation appears After the message the beep indi cates that the system is ready to accept your voice command Say a command after this beep 3 Say Destination Basic Operator Destination Map Operation Route Options Traffic Informaten Other Operation AY er ation Pol Return Home Address Waypoint Home Telephone Number Address Book Destination History Viewity Search Display Home Display Destination A message to prompt the next operation is given O Ifyou say Back or touch Back the screen returns to the previous screen 4 Say Vicinity Search Say the corresponding commands for the function you want to operate Here the selec tion method of your destination is specified When you want to search the gas station near est to the curre
16. ON or OFF Switching the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for all items at the time This function will be useful when you want to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the condition of each memorized song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off O When the alert setting is Alert Off EWE is displayed on the information plate Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Previous or Next to select the song title that you want to delete 3 Touch Delete This Song when the song you want to delete is displayed A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 4 Touch Yes Using the Traffic amp Weather pre EEEE set function You can listen to the memorized Traffic amp Weather channel by directly calling it up with the T button on the navigation system Only one sta tion can be memorized Memorize a Traffic amp Weather channel 1 Tune into the Traffic amp Weather channel 2 Press and hold the T button for two sec onds or more That Traffic amp Weather channel will be memo rized O Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner together only one station can be memo rized The station memorized afterward will overwrite the existing one Calling up the memorized Traffic amp Weather channel 1 Press the T button O You can call up a Traffic amp Weather
17. gation system Correcting the installation angle improves the accuracy of sensor learning even if the unit is not facing center Select the orienta tion of the LCD panel from the left center and right 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Installation Angle Setup 3 Check the direction the LCD panel faces and touch the corresponding item ff your unit is installed at an angle in rotation to the driver due to the angle of your dashboard setect the appropriate angie setup below incorrect angio setup could cause mcorroct pasitioning of the vehicle on the map x Lefi hd Center 1l Right e ra Em Left Select this when the angle is 5 or more to the eft from the center default is when the angle is less than 5 to he left and right from the center Right Select this when the angle is 5 or more to the ight from the center O If the Learning Status in the 3D Cali bration Status is Simple Hybrid the installation angle can be corrected nor 9 oO 2 3 gt 4 Checking the device and version information 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Service Info Screen 3 Check the device and version information Checking the hard disk informa tion You can check the volume of the hard disk cur rent used space and remaining space O The hard disk s
18. icon egory icon for the selected chan Category he ca nel Touch key operation 1 To 130 Touch the source icon and then touch XM to select the XM When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen uch keys GEX P10XMT GEX P920XM Page 1 All Ch Mode gt P C 001 P C O01 P C 001 _ PC O81 Poh O01 Per O01 Run 2 Snow Patrol n 7 ees E M o 10 Touch keys GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM De ems marked with an asterisk cannot be used on GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM 1 set Touch Recalling channels from the pre Touch to recall the preset channel im im n All Ch Mode you can also recall the preset channel by pressing the P LIST A V but on n Category Mode the screen shows cate gory search Touch and hold Storing broadcast stations You can register the channel currently being broadcast to the preset list im im 2 Up to 18 stations 6 for each of three XM bands can be stored in memory f you use GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM the channel number does not appear on the ouch key Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at a time im im 3 f you keep touching KEETE or you can skip broadcasting channels You can also perform these operations by usi
19. ion both vertically and horizontally ideal for a cinema sized picture wide screen picture O Different settings can be memorized for each video source O When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio it may appear differently O Remember that use of mercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author s rights protected by the Copyright Law O Video may appear grainy when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode era picture is always Full Setting for rear view camera The following two functions are available The rear view camera feature requires a separately sold rear view camera e g ND BC2 For details consult your dealer Camera for backing up The navigation system features a function that automatically switches to the full screen rear camera image installed on your vehicle When the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position the screen automatically switches to full screen rear view camera Camera for Rear view mode Rear View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer etc as a split screen where map information is partially displayed Please be aware that in this setting camera image is not resized to fit and that a por tion of what is seen by the camera is not view able 156 his system for com O The navigation map and the rear view cam A CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use o
20. right speaker balance towards the left or the right Left 9 to Right 9 is displayed as right speaker balance moves from he left Using subwoofer output The navigation system is equipped with a sub woofer output which can be turned on or off O When the subwoofer output is on you can adjust the cut off frequency the output level and the phase of the subwoofer 1 Touch Sub Woofer in the Audio Settings menu When Preout the subwoofer controller set ting in System Settings menu is Full you cannot select Sub Woofer gt Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller Page 158 2 Touch On to turn subwoofer output on To turn subwoofer output off touch Off 3 Touch Reverse or Normal to select the phase of subwoofer output O If subwoofer output sound is not clear with Normal change it to Reverse 4 Touch lt or gt to select cut off frequency Each time you touch lt or gt selects cut off fre quencies in the following order 50 80 125 Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the selected range are output from the subwoofer 5 Touch or to adjust the output level of the subwoofer 6 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased 152 eft to right Using non fading output When the non fading output setting is on the audio signal does not pass through the naviga tion system s low pass filter for the subwoofer but is output through
21. 1 Touch DVD V Setup in the System Set tings menu Touch Parental Level 3 Touch 0 9 to input a four digit code number 4 While the input number is displayed touch Enter The code number is registered and you can now set the level 5 Touch any of 1 8 to select the desired level The parental lock level is set e Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is possible initial setting e Level 7 Level 2 Playback of discs for children and non adult oriented discs is possible e Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil dren is possible O Ifyou want to change the parental level enter the registered code number in the Step 3 O We recommend that you keep a record of your code number in case you forget it O The parental lock level is recorded on the disc You can confirm it by looking at the disc package the included literature or the disc itself With discs that do not feature a recorded parental lock level you cannot use parental lock O With some discs parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only after which nor mal playback resumes For details refer to the disc s instructions O If you forget the registered code number touch Clear 10 times on the screen in the Step 3 The registered code number is can celed letting you register a new one Changing the wide screen mode A CAUTION For safety reasons these functions are not available whil
22. 1 Touch List XM channel list appears in the display Each touch of the List changes the settings as follows Detail information display Ch Name List Channel name Song Title List Song title Artist Name List Artist name 2 Touch the desired channel that you want to listen to Touch M or H to switch to the next page or previous page O During the Category Mode touch Up or Down to switch to another category 131 m gt lt SNIUIS IWX 221Nn0S AY 24 Buisn EAN bE Teh 11 be EE Using My Mix function gt lt Chapter 13 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being received When the song that matches the memorized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song A track itself is NOT downloaded ONLY the song title and the artist name are memorized Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix 1 Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of current song irmation message appears O The song title and artist name of up to 15 songs can be memorized Trying to save O The song title or the artist name cannot be memorized when
23. 67 Destination menu 26 205 Detail 36 device and version information 99 device name 83 86 Dial Favorites 90 dialed number history 87 Dialed Numbers 92 rect scale key 44 stance study 99 stance to the destination 32 33 42 olby D 112 olby Digital 202 iver s View 40 TS 202 DVD 110 154 161 196 DVD menu 111 112 GV9U0000DD E Emergency Info 77 80 Emergency TOW service 78 Enlarged map of the intersection 41 equalizer 149 equalizer curves 150 Errors 185 Estimated time of arrival 33 42 97 EXT 145 External Unit 145 F ader balance 151 avorite browsable Information 76 Favorite Location 57 61 63 100 202 FM 113 Frame by frame playback 111 Front Display 4 198 G Game Alert 135 Genre group 120 Genres 120 122 GPS 183 184 202 GPS antenna 97 Gracenote Database 106 117 120 128 Gracenote Music recognition service 202 Group 120 Guidance mode 202 Guidance point 42 202 Guide Mode 39 H ands free Phoning 83 92 ard Disk 22 196 198 hard disk information 99 hard disk recording 106 eading up 42 high pass filter 152 ome location 57 61 63 100 202 D3 tag 109 202 lumination 98 nactive touch key 27 incoming call 86 nformation menu 26 205 nformation plate 105 installation angle 99 nstallation Position 97 nstant Traffic amp Weather 133 insurance policy number 78 iPod 14 iPod adapter 141 SO9660 format 203 J
24. AV Guide Mode to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting On Switches from the audio operation screen to the navigation screen Off Does not switch the screen Changing the Map Color You can set the map color to bluish or reddish 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch Road Color to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting Blue Changes to blue based map colors Red Changes to red based map colors O Check the color change with the Map Legend 51 5 suoneanBiyuop dew 6uikypow PEEL be i IAWN C me suoiesnbiyuos dew BuiAyipow 52 Chapter 5 IAWN i Setting a Route to Your Destination e Searching a PO directry from a name of the A CAUTION facilities e For safety reasons these route setting functions are not available while your Searching fora POI directly vehicle is in motion To enable these func from the name of the facilities tions you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting 1 Touch Destination in the navigation your route see page 20 for details menu and then touch POI Search O Some information on traffic regulations 2 Touch the state code key of the destina depends on the time when the route calcula tion and select the state or province or tion is performed Thus the information may territory not correspond with a certain traffic regula
25. Back Return the Destination menu 5 Touch the detailed category If the category is not sub divided into more detailed categories the list will not be dis played Proceed to Step 6 6 Input the name of the facilities You can also narrow down the candidates by specifying the city before the name input D Subsequent Operations Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facili ties Page 54 Step 4 and 5 Searching for POIs by specify ing a city name first 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch POI Search 2 Touch the state code key of the destina tion and select the state or province or territory D Selecting the state or province where you want to search gt Page 28 3 Touch City 4 Input the name of the city that has the facility you want to search for e Category g Auto fill in function is available D Auto fill in function Page 29 ers appear List Lists candidates based on the yellow charac ers in the text box Suggested characters in white are invalid Touch the desired city in the ist to proceed to the next step 5 Input the name of the facilities You can also narrow down the candidates by specifying the category before the name input A list of cities that include the entered charac D Subsequent Operations Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facili ties Page 54 Step 4 and 5 Finding a POI in the
26. Basic Navigation 27 Calculating your destination by using Address Search 28 Checking and modifying the route 32 When the route guidance starts 33 Canceling the Route Guidance 33 Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions 34 Items that users can operate 34 Checking the Current Route 35 Checking the passing streets with a list 35 Checking the entire route overview on the map 36 Editing Waypoints 36 Adding a waypoint 36 Deleting a waypoint 37 Sorting waypoints 37 Skipping a waypoint 37 Chapter 3 How to Read the Map Display How to Use the Map 39 Switching the view mode 39 How to view the map of the current location 39 Roads without turn by turn instructions 43 Changing the scale of the map 44 Scroll the map to the location you want to see 44 Shortcut menu 45 Chapter 4 Modifying Map Configurations Entering the Map Menu 47 Setting the Item on the Map Screen 47 Selecting the Shortcut 49 Displaying POI on the Map 50 Viewing the Map Color Legend 50 Changing the View Mode for the Navigation Map 51 Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night 51 Changing the Setting of Navigation Interruption Screen 51 Changing the Map Color 51 Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your Destination Searching for Points of Interest POI Statewide 53 Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 53 Searching for POls by specifying a category first 54 Searching for POls by specifying a city name firs
27. ER ER THIS EPRESENTATION AND OTI TY DISCLA OF LIABILITY SET FORTH Y REASO YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER S L NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT RICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EER PRODUCT not allow the exclusion or limita consequential damages so ion or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia bility shall not be applicable to the exten that ed by any applicable federal state or local law which provides that such a dis claimer or limitation cannot be waived o empted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You agree and c pre ertify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from Pio neer nor the dir exported outside ized and as permitted by the laws and reg autho ect product thereof will be he United States except as ulations of the United States If the Software has peen expor This Agreement may terminate it at any 5 TERMINATION ightfully obtained by you outside of the United States you agree that you will not re the Software nor any other technical data eceived from Pioneer nor the direct product hereof except as permitted by the laws and reg ulations of the United States and the laws and egulations of the ju obtained the Software isdiction in which you s effective until terminated You ime by destroying the Software The Agreement also will t
28. Editing Waypoints gt Page 36 31 w A 2 G o ao pa S z o 5 N v 2 i k oO Basic Operation Multiote Route Options K Prof o Detail Wayponts BIIhZ7mi i 553m Wa Ba as Checking and modifying the route You can check the route details You can also recalculate the route in different conditions Route confirmation screen E 6 2 1 1 Route calculation condition Shows the route has been calculated under those conditions shows that fastest route is prioritized K shows that shortest route is prioritized e shows that using highways and main oads are prioritized Pri4 shows whether the suggested route includes freeways sy i shows whether the suggested route includes toll roads The current setting appears A shows whether the suggested route includes ferries The current setting appears il shows whether the suggested route includes learning routes The current setting appears In addition if the calculated route has unin tended results the following icons will be shown Fri shows that freeways could not be avoided E shows that toll roads could not be avoided when the setting Avoid Toll Road is On 32 Ei shows that ferries could not be avoided when the setting Avoid Ferry is On Ci shows for routes that contain streets or bridges t
29. Map orientation will be changed Recalculating the route culate Checking the current route Route Options Route Profile gt Displaying the route profile screen Route Options Next Guidance gt You can hear the information of next guidance point Canceling the route Route Options Cancel Route gt If the route is already set touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route Map Operation gt Change View Mode gt Map View Driver s View 2D Twin Map View 3D Twin Map View Route View Route Options gt Change Route gt Rerouting Use Main Road Use Fast Route Use Short Route Use Freeway Avoid Freeway Use Ferry Avoid Ferry Use Toll Road Avoid Toll Road gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to recal Route Options gt Cancel Waypoint gt If the waypoint is already set touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next way point 210A Y IM Wa SAg UOl EHIAeN Ano Huljesado L4 jaydeug NAVI AV Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 17 Checking the traffic list Traffic Information gt Traffic Events List gt Displaying the traffic event list Traffic Information gt Traffic On Route List gt Displaying t he traffic event list on your route Traffic Information gt Traffic Flow List gt Displaying the tr Erase the tracking Other Operation Erase Tracks gt Touch VOICE icon to Viewing the Emergency Info screen affic flow list dele
30. My Favorite 4 MyMix gt ayback selected playlist Operation Music Search My Favorite 1 My Favorite 2 My Favorite 3 My Favorite 4 MyMix gt Playback selected playlist Note 2 AV Operation gt Track Search gt lt Track name gt Playback the selected track Note 3 Note 2 This operation is available only when that group is already selected Note 3 This operation is available for the playlist currently playing After checking traffic information manually If traffic congestion is found after checking the traffic information manually Do you want to reroute appears on screen In this time you can say voice commands to operate Do you want to reroute 210A Y IM Wa SAg UOI EHIAeN ANO Huizeiado L4 T Teh 21 be Options Yes The route will be recalculated by touching the VOICE icon No The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears Location screen A and B Location screen A Set As Destination ig Set As Waypoint Display Map The following commands can be vocalized Set As Destination lf there is no route the system starts the route calculation If the route is already set touch the VOICE icon to start route calculation 171 wu Setas Waypoint Touch the VOICE icon to start route calculation Display Map Displays the map of surroundings on that location NAVI AV Call here lf the location has telephone number dat
31. Registering a track to My action gt Page 122 8 Repeat play Each touch of changes as follows e Track Repeat Repeat jus Playlist Repeat Repeat j playlist e No display Repeat the currently se group O Repeat play may stop if you range during track repeat pl tion that affects a track outsi ix playlis he repeat the curre ust the cu in one ange nt track rent ected ay perform an opera de the repeating g Ifyou perform random play or scan play dur ing track repeat play the repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat 9 Play tracks in random order The selected tracks in the repeated range are ran domly played O Random play may stop if you perform an oper ing track repeat play ation that affects a track outside the repeating ange or perform repeat play or scan play dur O When the range of repeat play is Track Repeat if you perform random play the epeating range changes to Playlist Repeat Indicator Implication Random Tracks of all playlists in the group only are played in random order Playlist Tracks in the selected playlist are Repeat and played in random order Random 10 Scan play Scan play will be performed for the selected repeat range O When the range of repeat play is Track Repeat if you perform scan play the repeat ing range changes to Playlist Repeat O When you find the des
32. To return to the previous screen touch Back Switching the automatic and manual function You can turn automatic and manual function on or off You can switch between Auto and Manual functions of the external unit connected Initially this function is set to Auto O Operating commands set for Auto and Man ual operations vary depending on the external unit connected Touch Function 2 Touch Auto Manual Touching Auto Manual switches between Auto and Manual O Operation varies depending on the exter nal unit connected In some cases the external unit may not respond g To return to the previous screen touch Back Operating the AUX Input Source AUX An IP BUS RCA Interconnector such as the CD RB20 CD RB10 sold separately lets you connect your navigation system to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output For more details refer to the IP BUS RCA Interconnector owner s manual Selecting AUX as the source 1 AUX Input is set to On D Switching the auxiliary setting gt Page 157 2 Touch the source icon and touch AUX gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 147 wi Cc w 5 a gt gt lt n o S a S lt m x lt a gt Cc 3 I S se deyo xnv 1X4 AV 224n0g Ay ay Busy 148 Chapter 16 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Various settings are available with the audio so
33. a f A of sequence REE af ki D Selecting the video for Rear display gt Page 159 a Select a source by using AV button AEON You can press the AV button to switch the source 02 Eye to eye 03 Integration s 1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper Ya PEET 05 Briliance wae a Minan ation screen 2 Press the AV button to select the desired source Press the AV button repeatedly to switch 1 Touch panel keys between the following sources Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys If you touch the screen the touch panel keys are displayed again n s a gt gt lt n o i 6 Ww S 7 s lt o g 2 S w s 2 a 2 amp 103 asl gt a Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio CD ROM MP3 DVD built in DVD drive LIBRARY Music library FM FM uner AM AM tuner XM XM tuner SIRIUS SIRIUS tuner iPod iPod M CD multi CD TV television AV INPUT video input AUX Auxiliary equipment EXT 1 external unit 1 EXT 2 external unit 2 O Inthe following cases the sound source cannot to be used When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to the navigation system When no disc is set in the navigation sys tem When no magazine is set in the multi CD player When AUX Input is set to Off D Switching the auxiliary setting
34. as the vehicle and then restart the engine When REC Mode is Manual source Recording is stopped Touch REC to record 1 Touch the source icon and touch the track being played LIBRARY i For details refer to Selecting a source gt Notes on CD recording Page 103 O Operations on the navigation system may take more time during recording than normal Screen configu ration g Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times speed You can listen to that sound during recording Music Library LIBRARY 1 2 3B 4 g The data is recorded using a highly efficient _ compression method so the sound may aor slightly differ from the original depending on BLE Ve to aye the sound source Noise may be heard in F Ot integration some cases but this is not an malfunction ee D5 Briliance g Recording is possible only with a CD that con en tains 44 1 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM digital audio 8 data a 1 Source icon O Recording or copying to the music library is Shows which source has been selected not possible from recording media such as CD Rs in which a CD or other data is digitally stored This is due to the Serial Copy Manage 2 Group name indicator Shows the group currently playing D Notes for Hard Disk Drive gt Page 22 8 Track list and playlist Shows the track list
35. audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and XED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching the mode between MP3 and CD DA The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations is the writing sequence used by the writing software For this reason the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence However there also are some writ ing software that pe back order e Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge mit the setting of the play into one another without a pause When these CD R CD RW CD ROM the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one he pause between CD e Files are compa o ible with the ID3 Tag Ver 1 0 o le track track title and artist track artist discs are converted to MP3 files and burned to egardless of the length of racks on the original audio nd Ver 1 1 formats for displaying album disc e The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 es of 32 44 1 and 48 kHz frequencies are ayed back 16 22 05 24 32 44 1 48 kHz ampling frequencies can be played back e There is no m3u playlist compatibility e There is no compatibility with the MP3i MP3 interactive or MP3 PRO formats e The sound quality of MP3 files generally Io G gt uct can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps but in order to be able to enjoy s
36. calculated based on the value set for Average Speed and the actual driving speed The estimated time of arrival is only a eference value and does not guarantee arrival at that time gt How to set average speed gt Page 97 12 Tracking dot The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has traveled by white dots D Select the tracking setting gt Page 47 13 Map of your surroundings Side map Touching the screen changes the map to the Scroll mode gt Scroll the map to the location you want to see gt Page 44 14 Distance to a turning point Displayed on the enlarged intersection map The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle approaches a turning point 15 Next direction of travel When you approach an intersection it appears green The screen displays the distance to the next guidance point 16 Direction line The direction towards your destination or scroll cursor is indicated with a straight line 17 Lane information Lane information is displayed the first time there is a voice guidance on your route The white arrow on the green background indicates the rec ommended lane If the next traveling direction screen is displayed when you approach a inter change junction or exit the lane information disappears 18 Freeway signs Show the road number and give directional infor mation 19 Freeway exit information Displays the freeway exit 20 Bluetooth Con
37. clear Phone Settings and delete it together with other functions e With some cellular phones the speakers of the system may not produce a ring sound e If private mode is selected on the cellular phone hands free phoning may not be per ormed About registration and connection e Cellular phone operations varies depending on the type of your cellular phone Refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellu lar phone for detailed instructions About making and receiving calls e You may hear a noise in the following situa tions When you answer the phone by using the button on the phone When the person on the other end of line hangs up the phone e lf the person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo decrease the volume level for hands free phon ing This may reduce the effects of the echo e With some cellular phones even if you press accept button on the cellular phone when a call arrives hands free phoning may not be performed e The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in the phone book When one phone number is registered under different names the name that comes first alphabetically is dis played e If the phone number of the received call is not registered in the phone book the phone num ber of the received call appears About received call history and dialed num ber hi
38. gt Page 157 When AV Input is not set to Video gt Setting the video input Page 156 O The term external unit refers to future Pio neer devices that are not currently planned ions although they are not fully controlled by he navigation system Two external units can be controlled by this navigation system When wo external units are connected the naviga ion system allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 O When the Auto ANT mode is set to Radio the vehicle s antenna can be stowed or turned off by following the instructions below Change the source from radio AM or FM o another source Turn the source off Turn off the ignition switch ACC OFF lf the Auto ANT mode is set to Power the vehicle s antenna can be stowed or turned off only when the ACC is set to OFF gt Auto ANT gt Page 158 104 or or devices that allow control of basic func About Steering Remote Control O When using the CD SR1 Steering Remote Control sold separately the following but tons can be used for operation PHONE MENU button Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button Press to accept the call when there is an incom ing call n other situations press to start the voice opera ion VR CANCEL ON HOOK button Press to reject a call when there is an
39. pause 3 Touch Skip forward or backward Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next track ouching k once skips to the start of the cur ent track Touching again will skip to the previ ous track Touch and hold fast backward or forward eep touching ka a or gt gt I to perform fast back ward or forward g You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 4 Play back the previous disc The disc before the currently played disc will be played 5 Play back the next disc The disc after the currently played disc will be played 6 Repeat play Each touch of EEN changes the settings as fol ows Track Repeat Repeat just the current track Disc Repeat Repeat the current disc O If you select other discs during repeat play g If you perform track search or fast forward rewind during Track Repeat the repeat play range changes to Disc Repeat 7 Play tracks in random order Tracks will play in a random order within the pre viously selected repeat ranges Indicator Implication Random Tracks of all disc in the magazine only are played in random order the repeat play range setting will be canceled Disc Repeat Tracks in the selected disc are and Random played in random order Ifyou perform random play during Track Repeat the repeat play range changes to Disc Repeat 140 8 Scan play The first 10 seconds of each track of
40. ps 1619 Quechua qu 1721 Rhaeto Romance rm 1813 Kirundi rn 1814 Rumanian ro 1815 Kinyarwanda rw 1823 Sanskrit sa 190 Sindhi sd 1904 Sango sg 1907 Serbo Croatian sh 1908 Shinghalese si 1909 Slovak sk 1911 Slovenian sl 19 Samoan sm 1913 Shona sn 1914 Somali so 1915 Albanian sq 1917 Serbian sr 1918 Siswati ss 1919 Sesotho st 1920 Sundanese su 1921 Swahili sw 1923 Tamil ta 2001 Telugu te 2005 Tajik tg 2007 Thai th 2008 Tigrinya ti 2009 Turkmen tk 2011 Tagalog tl 2012 Setswana tn 2014 Tongan to 2015 Turkish tr 2018 Tsonga ts 2019 Tatar tt 2020 Twi tw 2023 Ukrainian uk 2111 Urdu ur 2118 Uzbek uz 2126 Vietnamese vi 2209 Volapu k vo 2215 Wolof wo 2315 Xhosa xh 2408 Yoruba yo 2515 Zulu zu 2621 N 161 lensi A olpny y im poyejas Bulyjag olpny y Bulziwoysng Qa gt w xo O o I 9 Aa deyD lens A Olpny y im pajejas Buiy s oipny y Huiz wozsng 162 Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice AW IAWN To Ensure Safe Drivin Ue _ 1 Touch the VOICE icon to activate voice operation A CAUTION y e For safety reasons Voice Help menu Voice Recog Help is not available while 2 Speak a command into the micro your vehicle is in motion To enable this phone after the beep function you must
41. the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft ware by reverse engineering disassembly decompilation or any other means You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other persons or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copy right trade secret patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Software The Software is copyrighted and may not be copied even if modi fied or merged with other products You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or propri etary legend contained in or on the Software You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party pro vided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License Agree ment 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are pro vided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LICEN SOR S for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be collectively referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLU SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The S
42. 2 Play back the track you want to record 3 Touch REC The track being played is recorded When recording finishes the system returns o the normal playback screen of the CD in the end of the track O To cancel the recording touch Stop Recording only the first track of aCD You can record only the first track of the CD This mode is useful when you want to record only the first tracks from multiple CD singles or EPs con secutively 1 REC Mode is set to Single gt Setting the CD recording mode gt Page 158 O The REC Mode cannot be changed during recording 2 Insert the CD you want to record Recording automatically starts for the first rack When recording finishes the system returns o the normal playback screen of the CD in the end of the track O To cancel the recording touch Stop Stopping CD recording You can stop recording while recording a CD Recording can resume depending on the record ing mode 1 Touch Stop When REC Mode is Auto or Single Recording is paused and the system starts Music Library Play lt normal CD playback To resume recording A 2 touch REC Recording also resumes in the You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in following cases the hard disk drive in the source named music When you switch to another source and library LIBRARY then return to the CD source When you turn off the ignition switch of the Selecting LIBRARY
43. 3 Press the MENU button This displays the navigation menu Chapter 2 um IAW 4 Assign a destination by using the touch panel key and beginning route guidance or operating the Audio source 1 Destination information Map Settings G rae 1 j cy Ran Po Address Return Gorto POI Route Search Home Search Overview Ne By A k WN Address Destination Telephone Vicinity Cancel Book History Search Search Route mee oo O Touch keys that are not available at this time are inactive Specifying the address and searching the destination Page 28 Searching the destination by map gt Page 45 Other search methods Page 53 to 58 gt How to use audio source gt Page 103 to 161 QO Q Q 2 Hs iY xo is N 5 Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate the system The navigation system is also turned off O Until your vehicle reaches the vicinity of the destination the set route will not be deleted even if the engine is turned off uo1 1ado oiseg 25 mg How to Use Navigation Menu Information menu 5 Screens Z i The basic navigation is performed by using ae Pikea tise re menus The navigation menu is divided into four menus ee ial ee ee Destination Information Map and Set tings Use this menu to chec raffic information using Displaying the Navigation menu the SEX P10xMT f you are using acellular phone featuring Blue 1 Press
44. Book Any place that has been searched before is stored in Destination History Places that you have registered manually such as your home are stored in Address Book Simply select the place you want to go to from the list and a route to that place will be calculated D For information on Address Book Page 63 D For information on Destination History gt Page 67 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Address Book or Destination History 2 Touch your destination name P COHASSET ST i KOFFIE i BURBANK GLENDALE PA gt 4 EI L A LEMP AVE i A N ROSE ST a7 hi PERSHING SQUARE When a route is not set route calculation starts immediately D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When a route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 31 O You can also see the destination by touch ing 3B on the right of the list 58 Registering deleting POI Short cuts You can register up to six shortcuts as your favor ite POI You can also change or delete the regis tered shortcuts O You can register a POI shortcut by touching Pil on the Shortcut menu The steps for reg istration and deletion are almost the same as described below Registering a POI shortcut 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search 2 Touch Set a eee eee Vicinit
45. D Specifying the address and searching for the gt Using XM NavTraffic Information gt Page 69 destination Page 28 gt Emergency Info gt Page 77 gt Other search methods gt Page 53 to 58 ND BT1 Sold separately Use for hands free phoning and business card transfer via Bluetooth technology Map menu i ______ TEL i mya Settings amp Displayed Short Cut Overlay Map Legend View Mode Info Selection PO Day Night AV Guide Road Color Display Mode Automatic a p Blue You can change the View Mode or set the items to be displayed during the navigation func tion 26 O View Mode can be selected only when the vehicle position is at the current position If you want to select View Mode while scroll ing the map press the MAP button to center the current position back on the vehicle posi tion Settings menu Information i Map r i Defined Regional Hardware Background Settings Locations Picture Setting Demo Modify Restore Mode Current Factory on d pn ks Customize the navigation functions so they can be used easily D Settings menu gt Chapter 10 eeeeeeeceeeaeoeeoeoeeoeeeoeeeee Buttons you can use The availability of a specific button or function is indicated by its appearance Depending on the status of your vehicle some buttons will be avail able while others will not be Address Search a Active touch key The button is o
46. Demonstration Guidance 102 Correcting the Current Location 102 Restoring the Default Setting 102 Chapter 11 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Basic Operation 103 Switching the Audio operation screen 103 Selecting a source 103 About Steering Remote Control 104 Viewing the audio operation screen and display ing the Audio Settings menu 105 Operating a Music CD 106 Selecting CD as the source 106 About auto hard disk recording 106 Screen configuration 106 Touch key operation 107 Operating the CD ROM MP3 disc 108 Selecting ROM as the source 108 Screen configuration 108 Touch key operation 108 Notes on playing MP3 disc 109 Operating the DVD 110 Selecting DVD as the source 110 Screen configuration 110 Touch key operation 1 Searching for a desired scene starting play back from a specified time 112 Entering the numerical commands 113 Operating the Radio FM 113 Selecting FM as the source 113 Screen configuration 113 Touch key operation 114 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 114 Tuning in strong signals 114 Operating the Radio AM 115 Jas u Cc e Selecting A the source 115 Screen configuration 115 Touch key operation 115 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 116 Tuning in strong signals 116 Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Li brary Music L
47. Hybrid sensor The built in sensor which enables the system to estimate your vehicle s position A learning function increases its accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory Address Book A list of locations registered manually Aspect ratio This is the width to height ratio of a TV screen A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4 3 Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16 9 providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere Bit rate This expresses data volume per second or bps units bits per second The higher the rate the more informa tion is available to reproduce the sound Using the same encoding method such as MP3 the higher the rate the better the sound Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book With DVD Video discs featuring chapters you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search Current location The present location of your vehicle your current loca tion is shown on the map by a red triangle mark Default setting A factory setting which applies when you first switch on the system you can customize default settings to suit your own needs in the menu Destination A location you choose as the end point of your journey Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi channel audio from up to 5 1 independent channels This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system use
48. Joliet 203 JPEG 101 K eyboard 29 96 L Language 95 154 167 Learning Route 35 Learning Status 98 Linear PCM 203 Location confirmation screen 31 oudness 152 M m3u 203 ap Color 50 51 ap Legend 50 ap matching 184 ap Menu 26 47 206 ap Mode 39 emo 132 136 emo Edit 132 137 essages 192 odify Location 66 P3 108 109 203 EG 203 i Angle 154 203 i audio 203 i CD 139 iple routes 32 i session 203 i subtitle 203 sic Library 117 119 TE lead 157 e Voice Guidance icon 43 ing attenuation 157 Favorite group 120 Favorites 76 120 122 ix 122 132 136 U 3 5 SS Se eee Ce Soe eS N avigation Background 100 avigation menu 26 205 non fading 152 159 orth up 42 otification icon 72 TSC 204 0 Optical digital output 203 211 AW IAWN i gt 5 5 3 2 X MM Options 34 NAVI AV Appendix P Pacific Standard Time 96 Packet write 203 PAL 204 Parental lock 155 203 Parking Brake 98 Parking brake interlock 20 Phone Book 87 89 90 93 phone call 86 87 Phone Connection Status 97 hone Menu 83 hone number 65 hone Ringtone 95 hone Voice 95 icture 66 91 picture adjustment 160 playlist 119 121 122 123 125 126 166 playlist edit mode 124 POI 21 43 45 50 53 55 165 199 203 POI Search 53 54 55 88 POI shortcut 55 58 position effect 151 Power Voltage 98 Profile 35 profile for the Bluetooth unit 83 pr
49. Qa 4 v mo g v 4 z e I 46 Chapter 4 um 5 Modifying Map Configurations Close Up View A CAUTION You can select the method to display the close For safety reasons these functions are not up view of the intersection available while your vehicle is in motion 2D To enable these functions you must stop Displays the close up view with the 2D map in a safe place and put on the parking 3D brake before setting your route see page Displays the close up view with Driver s 20 for details View Off Does not display the close up view Entering the Map Menu City Map 1 Press the MENU button to display the You can select whether to display the city map navigation menu when in certain metropolitan city areas On 2 Touch Map to display the Map menu Automatically switches to the city map when in a city map area 3 Change the setting Off gt Adjusting each item gt Page 47 to 51 Does not show the city map g This section describes the details of the O Even if you switch City Map to On city setting for each item Settings marked with map cannot display in areas where there is an asterisk show that these are default no city map data or factory settings Tracking Display Setting the Item on the Map You can trace locations that you have already Screen passed with white dots on the route You can select whether to display or hide the icon aiiu o 2 ae wy o
50. Satellite d separately attached em and have an active sub raffic service you ca nd information on your he unit receives onsa navigation display When t updated traffic information the navigation sys affic i ap and also display detai when available Whe oute and there is tra en you Ou would li e automatically O The system ion If there is a han 100 miles O The naviga avTraffic Displayi Displayi Sugges tion by using t O The term t indicates the follo ion bloc ed roads map route the system wil e to be rero acquires o 100 miles in radius around your vehicle ng a list of t ng traffic in ing a route n you ffic lot o raffic wing aret nformation detect it and ask you if uted o he from the vehicle posi traffic information he view nformation on your led text information aveling along a on your cur suggest another raffic information up adius will be shorter ion system provides the following unctions by using the in ormation from XM affic information ormation on a map o avoid traffic conges information affic congestion in this section ypes of traffic informa stop and go stopped traffic closed This infor aken into consideration when checking your oute and the informat events cannot be turned off If you select other raffic in
51. TARB SC C OVO O 2 LL CH DFATHER S ZA LO ECT TABLE P QUIUQODP ONOJ LONG JOH S TOGO S ame Restaurant Chai LY RESTAU LI S GRILL amp E STAR STEAK ON PERK ZZA RUBY TU Category name Supermarkets C BANK USA J P K TORONTO DO UTUAL WELLS FA Restaurant Fast Food Chain PAIN BAJA FRES DONUTS HAAGE SILVER S OFFEE WENDY S RANT APPL BAR CHUC PIZZA GO HOUSE SFA ES CARL S JR CARVEL LDEN COR Barbecue Caf amp Espresso C eak House Thai Restaurant Others s RAL FA ORGAN CH BANK NATIONAL BANK OF CA NION BA RGO BANK C DONA SUBWAY SANDWICHES amp SALADS 1 BEE S B E CHEES ARIE CALL ILY RESTAURA DAY SHAKEY S PIZZA SIZZLER SWISS CHALET TGI F ASE KEY BANK ADA PNC BA K UNION BANK Bank amp ATM Ot inese Continen mo Ps PIZZA CLAI T PIZZA HUT LA SAL E BANK K REGIONS BA OF CAL ers al Creo FORNIA e Cajun BASKIN ROBBINS BOSTON MARKET BRAUM S CE CREAM BAKERY CHURCH S CHICKEN COLD STONE CREAME DAZS ICE CREAM HARDEE S HARVEY S IN N OU LD S PANDA EXPRESS QUIZNOS RUBIO TACO BELL TACO JOHN S 1 IGAN S BONANZA BONEFISH JUMPER COCO S LY STEAK HSE IHOP RESTAURA ENDER OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE PAPA JOH PONDEROSA STEAK HOUS LAU RENTIAN BANK OF CAN K ROYAL BANK OF CANADA US BANK WACHOVIA BANK French Gre
52. TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER S SUPPLIERS AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 9 IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS INCLUDING THE SOFT WARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non transferable non exclusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products the Software and the related documentation solely for your own per sonal use or for internal use by your business only on such Pioneer products You shall not copy reverse engineer translate port modify or make derivative works of the Soft ware You shall not loan rent disclose publish sell assign lease sublicense market or other wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft ware by reverse engineering disassembly decompilation or any other mea
53. Touch an item you wish to store If an item is divided into more detail catego ries select the one from the list to narrow down the category After narrowing down the message confirming whether or not to regis ter the item 4 Touch OK OK if you want to store this item ia the My Favorites list lf the storing step is successful the confirma tion screen will appear Touch OK to complete the storing and return to the previous screen 76 Displaying favorite browsable Information You can check and delete the browsable informa tion you registered 1 Store the desired item topic D Storing browsable information gt Page 76 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch My Favorites A list of registered items topics appears on the screen 3 Touch an item to display the contents a i ae en My Favorites Sports gt NFL Atlanta Falcons Sports gt NFL Carolina Panthers Sorts Golf Pe Sports gt Nascar Sports gt NBA Atlanta Hawks Sports NBA gt Atlanta Hawks Den 75 Atl 32 02 Sports provided by Stats Inc Deleting favorite browsable information 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch My Favorites 2 Touch Delete 3 Touch the items you want to delete Delete Favorites Sports gt NFL Atlanta Falcons Sports gt NFL Carolina Panthers me Sports Golf Sports Nascar Sports gt NBA Atlanta Haw
54. YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT 4 Limitation of Liability TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM AGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED HEREIN TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY CAUSE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT 5 Termination This Agreement will terminate immediately and automatically without notice if you breach any term of this Agreement You agree that in the event of termination of the Agreement you shall return the Data including all documentation and all copies to Tele Atlas and its suppliers 6 Indemnity You agree to indemnify defend and hold Tele Atlas its Licensors and its Suppliers including heir respective licensors suppliers assignees subsidiaries affiliated companies and the espective officers directors employees share holders agents and representatives free and harmless from and against any liability loss injury including injuries resulting in death demand act
55. also perform these operation with pressing the TRK lt gt button 3 Display the previous screen Touch on the refine search or other screen to return to the previous screen 141 m gt lt AL POd Gd IN 824n0g Ay a4 Busy EAA 1 dey EE 4 Narrow down the songs to play back gt Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV MOUEV Clam You can narrow down the choices of songs to play from five categories gt Browsing for a song gt Page 142 5 Repeat play Touch Pr repeatedly until the desired repeat range appears in the display e Repeat One Repeat just the current song e Repeat All Repeat all songs in the selected list 6 Shuffle play This function shuffles songs or albums and plays them in random order Each touch of changes the settings as fol lows Shuffle Songs Play back songs in random order within the selected list Shuffle Albums Select an album ran domly and then play back all songs in that album in order Browsing for a song The operations for controlling an iPod with this navigation system are designed to be close to iPod operation This allows you to search and play songs as you would with an iPod 1 Touch Search If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps 1 to 4 are finished the screen returns to the previous screen 2 Touch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song e Playlists playlists e Artis
56. and menu On this screen you can operate the following items You can select the language to be used for the SS navigation function Once you change the lan Volume Settings guage the system restarts 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings suoipuny uoljeBiaey 104 SHul jag jesauey ay HulAyipow OL TE Kel 1 be 2 Touch Language 95 Sq 3 Touch the language that you want to use gt a z Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Once you change the language the system restarts LD Language English with TTS English without TTS Fran ais Mipa ol O Touching Back returns you to the previ ous display O Ifyou select English with TTS the name of the next street you will pass is announced If you select English without TTS the name of the next street you will pass is not announced Setting the time difference Adjusts the systems clock Set the time differ ence from the time originally set in your navigation system 1 2 3 96 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings Touch Time To set the time difference touch or Time difference a eran eee enna Time 02 20 AM 1200 Summer Time The time difference between the time origi nally set in the navigation system Pacific Standard Time and the current location of your
57. are included in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Deselect All Deselects the selected categories Touch the desired detailed category a Public Service a Facility mE Police Station rr M Government Office MB Post otfice a Court House Convention Center Y TB city Conter Previously set categories will have a red check mark Touch Back Returns to the previous screen Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category You can select up to 100 items from the detailed categories Touch OK The POI in the selected category and subcate gory are searched Names of POls and their distance from your current location appear They are listed in order from nearest to farthest To the left of each item is an icon indicating the category T Mus post orrice j ME us postorrece ME us post orrce Bus post crrce M Bus post orrvce y 4 Eus post orrice Distance to the facility 8 Touch the desired POI to set your desti nation When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When the route is already set Location con firmation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 31 O When you touch amp the POIs around the specified location are shown on a map Searching for the facilities around the scroll cursor Searchi
58. audio source a message may appears on the display Refer to the table below to identify the problem then take the suggested corrective action If the error persists contact your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center Built in DVD drive Message Unreadable disc When f you try to use a disc which is incom patible with this system What to do nsert a suitable disc f you insert a disc upside down f the disc is dirty nsert the disc with the label upward Clean the disc f the disc is cracked or otherwise dam aged nsert a normal round disc echanical failure of DVD drive occurs Consult your Pioneer dealer Playback error Please remove the disc Electrical or mechanical error has occurred Press the RESET button Hardware manual after reading page 179 in this manual Region code error The disc does not have the same region number as the navigation system Replace the DVD Video with one bearing he correct region number Playback error due to irregu lar temperature Please remove the disc The temperature of the built in DVD drive exceeds the operating limits Park your vehicle in safe place turn the ignition switch off and wait until the built in DVD drive s temperature returns o within normal operating limits ATTENTION Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited Parking brake interlock is activated Pa
59. by infoUSA Copyright 2007 All Rights Reserved 2007 INCREMENT P CORP ALL RIGHTS RESERVED About Gracenote Music recognition technology and related data are pro vided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com D gracenote CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copy right 2000 2006 Gracenote Gracenote Software copy right 2000 2006 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade marks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote 11 End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this appli cation to do online disc identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote
60. errors frequently occur 181 Completely returning the navigation Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch Panels Tou ch Panel Calibration 182 Positioning Technology 183 Positioning by GPS 183 Positioning by dead reckoning 183 How do GPS and dead reckoning work ogether 184 Handling Large Errors 185 When the positioning by GPS is impossible 185 Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse Data 185 Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning Errors 185 Troubleshooting 188 Problems in the screen 188 Messages and How to React to Them 192 Tracking 199 P3 files 200 Glossary 202 Displaying POI 199 Detail Information fo DVD discs and other DVD media types 199 About playing Dua CD R CD RW discs 200 essages for navigation functions 192 Messages for Audio Built in DVD drive Hard disk drive Music Library 197 Other sources 197 When the hard dis Route Setting Inform Route search spec Route highlighting Functions 196 196 drive is disconnected 198 ation 198 ifications 198 199 Playable Media 199 Disc 200 Display Information 205 avigation menu 205 Shortcut menu 208 Menu in the Audio Screen 209 Audio Settings menu 209 System Settings menu Page 1 209 System Settings menu Page 2 209 Index 210 17 18 Before Using the System Important Safety Information Before using your navigation system be sure to ead and fully
61. format he chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of ransmission is minimized An optical digital output is designed to transmit digital signals optically Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD R etc at the time required for a file just as is done with iles on floppy or hard discs Parental lock Some DVD Video discs with violent or adult oriented scenes feature parental lock which prevents children from viewing such scenes With this kind of disc if you set the unit s parental lock level playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled or these scenes will be skipped Point of Interest POI Point Of Interest any of a range of locations stored in he data such as railway stations shops restaurants and amusement parks gt 5 5 3 2 X Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi cating the area in which they were purchased Playback of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same region number as the DVD player The navigation sys em s region number is displayed on the bottom of the navigation unit Route setting The process of determining the ideal route to a specific ocation route setting is done automatically by the sys em when you specify a destination Set route The route marked out by the system to your destination tis highlighted in bright green on the map Title DVD Video discs have high data capa
62. g If some candidates have been found the candidate list appears Select the one from the list and pro ceed to next step O During the voice operation location screen A or B may appear In such a case go to Location screen A and B in the later section and continue the voice operation D Location screen A and B gt Page 171 O The voice operations related the telephone are available only using hands free phoning feature of this system and is unavailable during a call D Using Hands free Phoning gt Page 83 g Terms written in italics are voice commands 167 mg Basic commands for voice operation NAVI AV Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 17 The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation screen Basic commands Back Return the previous screen Cancel gt Cancel the voice operation Current Location gt Return the current location map screen Voice Help gt Pronounces the display words that can be vocalised Next Page Previous Page gt Switch the page of Voice Help Menu Voice commands related to navigation Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen Search by address Destination gt Address gt lt City Name gt gt lt Street Name gt gt lt House Number gt gt Location Screen A Notes e Select the state province or territory manually before the voice operation e Whe
63. gt Page 63 5 Touch OK Completes the registration Registering a Location into Address Book The Address Book can store up to 400 regis tered locations These can include your home location favorite places and destinations you have already registered Registering a location by scroll mode You can perform the following operation when Registration is selected in Short cut selec tion 1 Scroll to the location you want to register Wi The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears D Editing the entry in Address Book gt Page 63 3 Touch OK Completes the registration 62 Registering a location by Address Book 1 Touch Address Book in the Destination menu 2 Touch Add BURBANK GLENDALE PA gt y BH LEMP AVE i ROSE ST i rs 1 PERSHING SQUARE Fi 3 Select the search method search the loca tion and display the map Select Search method Waseress WF po map Search Search Search a s HA ei Bestination MTolophone M vionity Address Book History Search Search 4 When the map of the location you want to register is displayed touch OK a cantara st The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears D Editing the entry in Address Book gt Page 63 5 Touch OK Completes the registration Viewing the Address Book 8 Sorts the items in the l
64. gt Selecting the state or province where you tion when your vehicle actually passes the want to search gt Page 28 location Also the information on the traffic ee regulations provided will be for a passenger 3 Input the name of the facilities vehicle and not for a truck or other delivery e vehicles Always follow the actual traffic regu lations when driving Searching for Points of Interest POI Statewide City n gt 5 amp 2 a D lt o lt oO 7 5 gt 53 Information about various facilities Points Of ai i Touch to specify the destination city or area Interest POI such as gas stations amusement l and then input the city name This is available parks or restaurants is available By entering the only when Name is blank POI Name you can search for a POI Category O You can also narrow down the search range Touch to specify the POI category This is by initially specifying the name of the city available only when Name and City are where your destination is located and also by blank initially specifying the category List O Use the functions POI Search and Vicin Lists candidates based on the yellow charac ity Search in different situations In POI ters in the text box suggested characters in Search the distance is not limited within the white are invalid Touch the desired facility in selected sta
65. he user The default or factory setting is the phone number of the Emergency Roadside Assis ance service provided by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc eeeeeeeeeeoeeeoeeoeoeeoeoe eee 1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance service 1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance service is available to all registered owners and provided by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc The first year of Emergency Roadside Assis tance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your navigation system is registered with Pioneer and you sign up on line with Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc at the time you register your navi gation system with Pioneer If you have not signed up for this service with Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc or if your free one year period has expired you are subject to charges by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc You are also subject to be changed by Signa ture s Nationwide Auto Club Inc for roadside services not included in the Emergency Roadside Assistance service The terms and conditions regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance service provided by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc are determined solely and exclusively by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc Please contact Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc or more information The telephone number that appears here by default is the toll free number for his service For additional details on registering or this
66. in an address book or phone book entry Data communication function with XM tuner f you connect the optional XM tuner GEX P10XMT to the navigation system you can use raffic information as a part of the navigation unction A separate subscription for XM avTraffic is required n addition if you subscribe to XM Audio ser vices you can utilize the XM display which fea ures station logos and category icons improving your XM Audio experience gt Using XM NavTraffic Information gt Page 69 o XM Satellite Radio gt Page 129 O The icon of each broadcast station is con ained in the hard disk drive based on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of Novem ber 2006 Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in he lineup or icon of the broadcast station in he future may not be supported by the navi gation system and may cause the unit to dis play incorrect icons gt Listening 22 About XM NavTraffic Service and Pioneer Navigation O XM NavTraffic subscription is required and is available only in select markets Check www xmnavtraffic com for service availability pricing information and other details The availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on the ability of the antenna to receive a signal The signal may be unavailable if obstructed e g by buildings mountains trees bridges bad weather etc XM NavTraffic data also may be unavailable or not current if the origi nal d
67. information is obtained the candidates screen appears 128 3 Select the desired album title from the list The title information is updated to the one you selected The updates for the Gracenote Database will be available in the future You can download the latest update from Pioneer website by using your PC To install the update burn the data onto a CD R RW and insert it into your navigation system When you download the files and install the update follow the instructions in the website Chapter 13 um Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Operating the XM Satellite GEX P910XM GEX P900XM Radio 1 3 5 You can use the navigation system to control an XM satellite digital tuner which is sold sepa rately 7 For details concerning operation refer to the XM tuner s operation manuals This section provides 3 i men information on XM operations with the navigation 5 a system which differs from that described in the XM tuner s operation manual About the logo for channel name Only the logo data that is contained in the naviga tion system can be displayed for each channel The logo of a newly established channel that is not contained cannot be displayed When no logo can be displayed the following substitute icon is Selecting XM as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch XM D For details refer to Selecti
68. is displayed on the title information O This function invalid for the channel 000 O There is a possibility the memorized title is not displayed correctly When the memorized song is broadcast Alert message is displayed Touch Yes to switch to that station and you can listen to that track O If the memorized song is not selected in My Mix list or Alert Off is selected no notifica tion will be provided even when that song is broadcast D Setting the alert for each memorized song Page 132 gt Switching the alert setting Page 132 O If there is slight difference between the mem orized title and the title of the song being broadcast no notification will be provided though they are the same song O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navigation system 132 you are listening to are memorized and a con more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones Setting the alert for each memorized song You can change the setting of the alert when the track is broadcast again You can enable or dis able alert for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit Memorized song list My Mix list will be dis played If the alert setting for the song is on the square on the right is blue Otherwise the square is inactive 2 Touch the song title that you want to exclude from the alert target A 01 WHITE SILVER SAN a 02 Summer of Love oa 13 Trip Around The me UE GO
69. keep touching ge or EZE you can skip broadcasting channels Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys O You can also perform these operation by using the TRK lt gt button 3 Store the strongest broadcast stations sequentially Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity can be registered automatically in the preset list gt Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially Page 144 143 wi AL POd G9 IN 824n0g Ay a4 Buisn EAA TE Kel 1 be mmm 4 Change band gt Touching Band switches between TV 1 and aq Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV B UE Clam TV 2 Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 P12 you can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta tions for later recall with a touch of the key 1 When you find a station that you want to store in me tuning key memory To panel keys a hem by touching the screen O Up to 24 stations 12 for each of two TV bands can be stored in memory You can also press the P LIST 4 but on to recall stations assigned to preset uning keys P1 P12 mory keep touching a preset P1 P12 The selected station is stored in memory The next time you touch the same preset tuning ey P1 P12 the station is recalled from switch between P1 P6 and P7 P12 touch n or M When the touch re not d
70. map screen allows you to check traffic information on your route while icon is displayed Only if there is any 71 IAWN O s w xo N uolyeuojuy orea Buisn NAVI i Chapter 7 z f 2 S E 2 p s dD S N gt raffic information on your route notification icon is displayed on the navigation map screen O Notification icon will not be available when your vehicle deviate from route O Traffic flow information is taken into account only when Traffic Flow in Traffic Set tings is checked 1 Set Show Traffic Incidents to View D Show Traffic Incident Page 48 2 Press the MAP button to display the cur rent location The icon appears when the system acquires traffic information on the current route 3 Touch icon during the icon is displayed Notification icon traffic information 4 Touch Detour to search for an alterna tive route O Detour will be enable only when the sys tem can find traffic congestion After touching Detour the route is recalcu lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur rent route into account O Notification icon shows the nearest traf fic information on the route However if you touch Detour the route is recalcu lated by taking into account not only this information but also all traffic congestion information on the route 72 On this screen you can select the follo
71. mi ba E O Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cat egory of facilities with the same name When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When the route is already set Location con firmation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 31 O Touching displays a map of the sur roundings of the selected POI 54 If the selected POI is the name of a chain of outlets and consequently the same store name applies to different locations the number of outlets appears next to the chain s name touch the name of the POI o display a list of those POIs with city name and street name touch to set the POI as your destination Searching for POls by specify ing a category first 1 2 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch POI Search Touch the state code key of the destina tion and select the state or province or territory D Selecting the state or province where you want to search gt Page 28 Touch Category Category Touch the desired category POI s are divided into several categories Ping CALIFORNIA Mi PE cas station me Bank 2 ATM MH Restaurant Bi supormarkats 5 Automotive Va Mj Retalor Chains Name Touch if you want to first specify the POI name City Touch if you want to first specify the destina tion city or area
72. need to change any of the current settings read the relevant section of this chapter Setting a Route to Your Destination This section describes various ways to search for a destination edit the current route condi tions and operate the route during route guidance Registering and Editing Locations You can register and edit the points on the map This chapter describes how to register a home location favorite location or other location and how to edit the entry in Address Book Using Traffic Information When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner GEX P10XMT is connected to the navigation system the system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic informa tion This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on the map and operation related traffic information Using XM Tuner and Other Information When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner GEX P10XMT is connected to the navigation system variety of information other than traffic can be acquired The navigation system can also reg ister emergency information This chapter describes ways of the information acquired with XM satellite radio registration of emergency information Using Hands free Phoning When you are using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth unit sold separately to the navigation system you can operate your cellular phone hands free This chapter describes the
73. needs or expecta tions that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pionee does not make any representations or warranties regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft ware in terms of its accuracy reliability or other wise 3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION COM PENSATORY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST INCOME LOST SALES OR USINESS EXPENDITURES INVESTMENTS OR MITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY SINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAM ES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR ABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PIO EER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR HOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD F SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION APPLIES OMNZ gt gt 3 gt PWNQW 5 TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIV THE AGGREGATE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE STI UALLY OR LIABILITY MISR TORTS IF PIO OR LIMITATIO AGREEMENT APPLICABLE LIABILITY SHAL 50 OF THE P ENCLOSED PIO Some states do he above limita hey are prohibi EER S WARRA SHALL OR FOR A WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR ion of incidental o D BREAC OF CONTRACT RICT
74. not firmly secured Secure the navigation system firmly ailure hard disk drive Consult your Pioneer dealer Rear display picture disappears 190 The setting for REAR SCREEN is incorrect Please read the following page and set the rear screen setting correctly Page 159 There was a problem with the Rear display or a faulty wiring connec ion for example Check the Rear display and its con nection Symptom Cause When the shift lever is in R the rear view camera images are displayed When MIRROR is selected in REAR SCREEN menu DVD V Setup is carried out Action See Select DVD or AV in REAR SCREEN menu When you move he shift lever to a position other than R the screen will be returned to the previous display You can not display the video image o Rear display during DVD V Setup menu Nothing is displayed and the touch panel keys cannot be used The setting for the rear view camera is incorrect Connect a rear view camera cor rectly The shift lever was placed in R when the rear view camera was not connected Press the AV button to return to the source display and then select the correct polarity setting for Camera Input D About Camera Input setting gt Page 156 The back light of the LCD panel is turned off Press the V button to turn on the back light Touch panel key is not resp
75. not use this instead of the speedom eter 6 Acceleration or deceleration Rota tional speed Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your vehicle is indicated Also rotational speed when your vehicle turns to left or right is shown 7 Inclination Degree of slope for the street is indicated eeaeeaeeeeaeeeaeaoeaeaoeoeaoeeoeaoeooeoooeoeaee To clear values If you want to delete the learned results stored in Distance Speed Pulse or Learning Sta tus touch the relevant result then touch Yes O Ifyou select Learning Status you can select Reset All or Reset Distance Study To clear all learning statuses touch Reset All To clear only the Distance study touch Reset Distance Study O Touch Reset All for the following cases e After changing the installation position of the navigation system e After changing the installation angle of the navigation system e After changing the navigation system to another vehicle O When the distance accuracy is low touch Reset Distance Study O Touching Reset All returns the installation angle setting also to the default or factory set ting Reconfigure the setting gt Correcting the installation angle Page 99 O The navigation system can automatically use its sensor memory based on the outer dimen sions of the tires Correcting the installation angle You can correct the installation angle of the navi
76. operations related to hands free phoning The behavior of your navigation system depends a number of general settings for navigation functions If you need to change any of the initial settings default settings read the relevant section of this chapter 1 0 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio 1 1 This section describes how to use DVD Videos CDs MP3 discs and the radio You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system This chapter describes recording music and playing back the recorded music 1 P Using the AV Source Music Library This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when an XM satellite radio tuner or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner is connected 1 3 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when Pioneer audio Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 1 equipment featuring IP BUS Multi CD player iPod adapter TV tuner is connected This chapter describes the audio source operations that can be used when connecting AV equipment with an RCA connector AV input future Pioneer devices external unit or aux liary equipment AUX 1 5 Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX Using the audio source various audio visual settings are available to suit your tastes This hapter describes how to change the settings Q 1 6 Custom
77. playback will start If the disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch DVD D For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Also see Handling and Care of the Disc in the Hardware Manual and Detail Information for Playable Media for more cautions about handling each type of media Screen configuration 1 4 6 5 7 3 8 beter b m En mma 9 2 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Sound output indicator Shows which sound output setting has been selected 3 Repeat range indicator Shows which repeat range has been selected 4 Title number indicator 1 Playback and Pause Shows the title number currently playing Touching gt H switches between playback and p lt 5 Subtitle language indicator pause Shows what subtitle language has been selected 2 Touch Skip forward or backward Touching gt gt I skips to the start of the next chap er Touching ke once skips to the start of the current chapter Touching again will skip to the 7 Audio language indicator previous chapter Shows what audio language has been selected 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing Touch and hold fast rewind or forward eep touching ka or gt gt to perform fast rewind or forward If you keep touching kaa or BPI for 8 Viewi
78. safety reasons these functions are not navigation available while your vehicle is in motion When set to IKIE guidance is output When To enable these functions you must stop set to no guidance is output in a safe place and put on the parking Beep brake before setting your route see page This setting controls the beep tone volume for 20 for details navigation Phone Ringtone This setting controls the incoming ring tone Entering the Settings Menu volume 2 0 a gases Phone Voice 1 Press the MENU button to display the This setting controls the incoming voice vol navigation menu ume g g O The Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice 2 Touch Settings to display the Settings adjustments are related to the cellular menu phone featuring Bluetooth technology No adjustment is needed when the cellular 3 Change the setting gt Adjusting each item gt Page 95 to 102 phone featuring Bluetooth technology is not connected G Volume of the audio source is adjusted by Setting the Volume for Guidance the VOL A F button of the navigation and Phone yeler The sound volume for the navigation can be set 3 To finish the setting touch OK You can separately set the volume of the route guidance and the beep sound Customizing the Regional Set tings 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Volume Changing the language for navi 2 Touch or to set their volume i ouea l lor E toset er oe gation guidance
79. service please check your product regis ration card included with this product If you are not interested in the free Roadside Assistance service this number can be edited and replaced by your own roadside assistance telephone num ber O The police number is shown as 911 and can not be changed 78 4 Locate Car Service gt Searching for car service in an emergency Page 79 5 Dial each number gt Dialing the corresponding number in emer gency gt Page 78 Dialing the corresponding number in emergency A CAUTION This function can be valid only when all fol lowing conditions are satisfied e The Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected with navigation system The communication for Hands free phon ing is activate between the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology and the navigation system 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Emergency Info 2 Touch a A list of telephone numbers appears onscreen 3 Touch the phone number you want to dial The signal is transmitted to the selected phone number Touching terminates the call Touch Back to return to the previous screen Searching for car service in an 4 Touch the selection method emergency n an emergency you can search the Emergency Ua nfo for Auto Services in the vicinity of your cur ns ent position and set the current route A WARNING
80. split screen where map information is partially dis played Please beware that in this setting camera image is not resized to fit to screen and that a portion of camera image may not be viewable Enlarged map of the intersection 24 This screen is displayed only when Close Up View in the Map menu is 2D or 3D O If the data for these items is not contained in Enlarged map of the intersection 2D the hard disk drive the information is not E FLORENCE AVE La on road City Map When City Map in the Map certain metropolitan city areas City Map is available at the 0 f 05 mile 50m 14 23 map scale or lower The screen changes auto available even if there are signs on the actual menu is On in a more detailed matically when you enter certain metropolitan Enlarged map of the intersection 3D city area 10 20 Display during freeway driving In certain locations of the freeway lane informa tion is available indicating the recommended O The detailed city map may not appear for the lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid following reasons ance in the hard disk drive When you are driving on While driving on the freeway freeway exit num bers and freeway signs may be displayed when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits T
81. stop in a safe place and 4 put on the parking brake before setting your route 3 When the command is recognized the navigation system displays the Depending on the selected languages the response message on the screen and commands that you registered before may pronounces it in some cases not be available 4 D About the relation for the language gt Page 167 4 As necessary repeat Step 3 Basics of Voice Operation 5 The requested operation will be car ried out Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest in voice recognition technology You can use voice O The voice operation may not be operable for a commands to operate many of its functions This minute after the navigation system has booted chapter describes where you can use voice com up mands and also what commands the system 7 accepts O If you operate using the CD SR1 Steering Remote Control sold separately the follow ing buttons can be used for operation d10A Y IM Wa SAg UOl eHIAeN ANO Huljesado L4 1 dey Flow of voice operation You can start voice operation any time even when the map screen is displayed or audio is operated Some operations are not available The basic VR CANCEL ON HOOK button steps of voice operation are as follows Return to previous screen VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button Same function as VOICE icon 163 EE To start voice operation NAVI AV o Q oO Operating Your Navigati
82. street you will travel g g You can display the view mode screen by along next and an arrow indicating the direction S touching Map in the navigation menu of travel lt and touching View Mode 39 gum Drivers View Shows a map from the driver s viewpoint 1 a NAVI Chapter 3 How to Read the Map Display 20 11 E SVEDAST OS ELST 4 8 21 About the 3D POI Depending on the data the POI may appear in graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in the left screen of Driver s View O The displayed POI in the left screen has no relation with the setting of Overlay POI 2D Twin Map View You can split the screen in half The right screen and the left screen can display a map in different scales The 2D map appears on the left screen 1 2 a a at ol ae SSS a in 11 mo A ug QU mpe I 8 4 7 3D Twin Map View You can split the screen in half The right screen and the left screen can display a map in different scales The 3D map appears on the left screen i ie a m 21 A
83. text information encoded on he disc during manufacture These discs may contain such information as the CD title track title and artist s name These discs are called O You can also perform these operations by CD TEXT discs using the TRK lt gt button 2 O When multiple options for the title information O Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the are found or no title information exists is beginning of the first track on the disc displayed 4 Stop playback O The title information displayed on the CD play When you stop playback by touching W that back screen and the recording screen is syn track number on the disc is memorized enabling chronized with the one edited in the music playback from that track when you play the disc library Once you edit the title information in again the music library the title displayed on each O To play the disc again touch I screen will change accordingly 5 Repeat the current track gt Editing a playlist or tracks gt Page 123 Each touch of WEE turns the repeat play on or O Up to 82 characters can be entered But the off navigation system incorporates proportional Track Repeat is displayed on the playback font Therefore the number of the characters method indicator during track repeat that you can display varies according to the O If you perform track search or fast forward or type of character rewind repeat
84. the page by saying Next page or Previous page O If you say Back or touch Back the screen returns to the previous screen To cancel voice operation You can cancel voice operation features at any time by saying Cancel After you cancel voice operation the map is displayed O If no command is made in the next 6 seconds or the recognition fails three times succes sively the voice recognition switches to standby mode To reactivate voice operation touch the VOICE icon Tips for Voice Operation For your voice commands to be correctly recog nized and interpreted ensure that conditions are suitable for recognition Reduce the volume setting on your vehicle audio system gt Switching the muting attenuation timing gt Page 157 Close the vehicle windows Please note that wind through the vehicle win dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the vehicle can interfere with voice operation Position the microphone carefully For optimum pick up the microphone should be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the driver Pause before giving a command Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to fail Pronounce your commands carefully Speak slowly deliberately and clearly O If the registered voice command and the default voice command is the same the regis tered voice command e g the pronunciation for the entry in Address Book and the playl ist in
85. the MENU button ooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth unit ND BT1 2 sold separately to the naviga 2 To change to the menu you want to use ion system you can configure Bluetooth settings touch the name of the menu displayed at or check the outgoing incoming call history You the top of the screen can also register information for emergencies 3 If you want to return to the map press the O Traffic On Route Traffic Events Traf MENU button fic Flow Stock Info Set My Favorites and My Favorites can be active only when he GEX P10XMT is connected to the naviga ion system Navigation menu overview Destination menu g Phone Menu is active only when the Blue ooth unit ND BT1 is connected to the nav igation system N v 2 k oO q Destinations Information i Map kx Settings amp Address Return Ci Poi Route Search Home Search Overview aa ia Sa T Cae e SoS SE a XM Digital Satellite Data amp Audio Receiver sold v Book History Search Search Route A Ti ff ici f ti V il bl fi r 2 4 separately Traffic information only available fo S a EAE w cities where information is provided by XM d feds amp You can search your destination in this menu NavTraffic service Active subscription to XM You can also check or cancel your set route from New affic is required to receive traffic informa ihis menu tion on the navigation system
86. the RCA output 1 Touch Non Fading in the Audio Settings menu Only when Preout the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu is Full you can select Non Fading D Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller gt Page 158 2 Touch On to turn non fading output on To turn non fading output off touch Off 3 Touch or to adjust the output level of the non fading 6 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low and high sound ranges at low volume 1 Touch Loudness in the Audio Settings menu 2 Touch On to turn loudness on To turn loudness off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to select a desired level Each time you touch lt or gt selects level in the following order Low Mid High Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the sub woofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers turn the HPF high pass fil ter on Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers 1 Touch HPF in the Audio Settings menu 2 Touch On to turn high pass filter on To turn high pass filter off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to select cut off frequency Customizing the System Set m Each time you touch lt or gt selects cut off fre tings Items gt quencies in the following order S 50 80
87. the current disc or the first track of each disc are played Indicator Scan only Implication The beginning of the first tracks of each disc is played for about 10 seconds The beginning of each track in the selected disc is played for about 10 seconds Disc Repeat and Scan g When you find the desired track or disc touch pg to turn scan play off O After track or disc scanning is finished nor mal playback of the tracks will begin again Operating the iPod You can control an iPod by combining the Pio neer iPod adapter sold separately to the naviga ion system For details concerning operation efer to the owner s manual of the iPod adapter This section provides information on iPod opera ions with the navigation system that differ from hose described in the owner s manual of iPod adapter O When you use the iPod sold separately with this Navigation System Pioneer iPod adapter is required iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries Selecting iPod as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch iPod gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration 4 6 oD w Greatost Hits CO One Keep Ya Hoad Pac 10 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Song number indicator Shows the number of the
88. the intersection or Driver s View left screen are only the special Points of Interest POI that contain the position informa tion Not all of Points of Interests POI are dis played gt 5 5 3 2 X Detail Information for Playable Media DVD discs and other DVD media types e It may not be possible to use certain functions with some DVD Video discs e It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs e When DVD R DVD RW discs are used play back is possible only for discs that have been finalized e When DVD R DVD RW discs are used play back is possible only for discs that have been recorded in Video format video mode It is not possible to play back DVD RW discs which 199 NAVI AV i Appendix have been recorded in Video Recording format VR mode It may not be possible to play back DVD R DVD RW discs that have been recorded in Video format video mode because of disc haracteristics scratches or dirt on the disc dirt scratches or condensation on the lens this product is not possible to play back general DVD OM discs or DVD RAM discs Only DVD ROM scs authorized by Pioneer can be read QO uter may not be possible depending on the nvironment and the application settings ease record with the correct format For details contact the manufacturer of the appli cation vooo Da DFOO About playing Dual Disc Dual Discs are two sided discs that have a re
89. the items not listed below are deleted The setting will be retained v The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Navigation functions Map function View mode and scale setting on the map v v Direction of the map v v Last cursor position on the map screen v v Route Setting Current route v v Guidance state of the current route v v Vehicle position information v v Route conditions v v v Destina Auto fill in function for cities and streets v v tion menu Point registered in Address Book av Sorting order selected in Address Book v v Informa Sorting order selected in Traffic Events v v tion menu Traffic On Route and Traffic Flow Traffic Settings v v Phone Settings Phone Menu v v Phone Book Dial Favorites Dialed v Numbers Received Calls Phone Menu Stock Info v My Favorites v Emergency Info v v Map menu Short Cut Selection View Mode v v Displayed Info Overlay POI Day Night v v v Display AV Guide Mode Road Color Settings Language Regional settings Time v v menu Regional settings Installation Angle Setup Hardware Defined Locations Modify
90. the map D Refer to the steps after Step 2 of Checking he entire route overview on the map gt Page 36 9 Add and edit waypoints You can add remove or sort waypoints D Editing Waypoints gt Page 36 When the route guidance starts Touching OK in Route confirmation screen starts the route guidance on the displayed route Your navigation system gives you the following information with the timing adjusted to the speed of your vehicle Distance to the next turning point Direction of travel Road number of the freeway Arrival of waypoint If waypoints are set Arrival of your destination o Touching EIE or G88 allows you to turn the voice guidance on or off CF Touching PASS allows you to hear the information again ing the route guidance your navigation sys em remembers your destination and route information When you start the engine and get back on the road the route guidance resumes O Ifyou deviate from the route with guidance set o Route View or Guide Mode and enter a street not recorded on the hard disk drive he screen changes to Map Mode When you return to the route the screen returns to O Ifyou stop at a gas station or a restaurant dur he original view and resumes route guidance Basic items on the screen This section describes only the basic items that are displayed on the Map Mode scr
91. the route and searches for another route intelligent rerouting Depending on the situation the sys tem may search a new route that does not return to the original one Route highlighting e Once set the route is highlighted in bright green or light blue on the map e The immediate vicinity of your starting point and destination may not be highlighted and neither will areas with particularly complex road layouts Consequently the route may appear to be cut off on the display but voice guidance will continue Roads not used in calculations Even though displayed on screen the following roads are not included in route calculations e Walkway e Public vehicle only e Non access road AW IAWN i D Viewing the Map Color Legend gt Page 50 Tracking e Your navigation system marks your course on the map in certain increments This is called tracking It is handy when you want to check a route traveled without guidance or if returning along a complex route e A maximum of about 155 miles 250 km is marked and as you travel beyond this limit tracking marks are erased in order from the most distant Tracking display shows about 100 miles 160 km tracking of your vehicle with white dots D Tracking can also be set for automatic erasing whenever the navigation system is switched off gt Page 47 Displaying POI Points of Interest POI that can be displayed on the enlarged map of
92. to the position where you want to set then touch OK 3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to set the direction then touch OK Restoring the Default Setting Resets various settings registered to the naviga tion system and restores to the default or factory settings 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Restore Factory Settings 2 Touch Yes to clear the current setting Touch No to cancel clear the current set ting gt Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings gt Page 179 Chapter 11 gum Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio You can play or use the following sources with Selecting a source the navigation system e DVD Video Select a source on AV Source Menu e CD e MP3 disc 1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper e Radio FM ation screen e Radio AM e Music Library 2 Touch the source icon D About the music library gt Chapter 12 Source ican c c eat NESA am This chapter describes how to use the audio a vn E E au source and the basic operation of the audio source 2 Eye to eye 03 Integration 04 PREMIER Basic Operation rec 05 Brilliance Switching the Audio operation screen AV Source Menu 1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper ED a i ation screen Touch OFF to turn the source off 3 doe O Touch REAR SCREEN to select the E source for Rear display T
93. vehicle is shown If necessary adjust the ime difference Touching or changes he time difference display in one hour incre ments The time difference can be set from 4 to 9 hours 4 f necessary set to summer time Daylight Saving Time DST is off by default Touch Summer Time to change the time if you are in the daylight saving period This turns the display below summer time On Time 02 20 AM 100 Summer Time 5 To finish the setting touch OK Customizing the keyboard lay out You can select the type of keyboard to be used for inputting characters 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Keyboard to select the layout that you want to use Each time you touch the key changes that set ting QWERTY default Changing the unit between km and miles This setting controls the unit of distance and speed displayed on your navigation system 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch km mile to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting mile default Show distance in miles Mile amp Yard Show distance in miles and yards km Show distance in kilometers Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle When calculating the expected time of arrival and the number of hours to the destination set the average speed for the freeway or ordinary
94. ybrid mode AW IAWN Check that the navigation system is securely mounted and if necessary consult the dealer that installed the system Connect the speed signal input pink lead wire of the power cable cor rectly and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen sor memory Learning Status The navigation system is installed with an extreme angle exceeding the imitation of the installation angle ndication of the position of your vehi cle is misaligned after a U turn or reversing Confirm the installation angle The navigation system must be installed within the allowed installation angle For details refer to Installation Man ual and Installation Angle Setup on page 99 Check whether or not the reverse gear signal input lead purple is con nected properly The navigation sys em works properly without the lead connected but positioning accuracy will be adversely affected The map continually reorients itself The traveling direction is always set o Heading Up Touch gf on the screen and change he map display The daylight display is used even when the vehicle lights are on Day is selected to Day Night Dis play Check the Day Night Display set ing gt Page 51 and make sure Automatic is selected The orange white lead is not con nected Check the connection The display is very dim No sounds are heard The volume level will not rise The volume o
95. your account since you last powered on he navigation system When you subscribe to both services this mes sage will stop appearing when you urn the ignition ON ACC ON No sounds are heard The volume level will not rise Cables are not connected correctly Connect the cables correctly The system is performing still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD video There is no sound during still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD video The system is paused or performing ast rewind or forward during the P3 disc playback For an MP3 there is no sound on fast rewind or forward DTS is selected for the DVD Video disc sound track Switch to a non DTS sound track The icon is displayed and opera tion is not possible The operation is not compatible with he DVD s configuration This operation is not possible For example the DVD playing does not feature that angle audio system subtitle language etc 191 AW IAWN gt 5 5 3 2 X NAVI AV Appendix Symptom The picture stops pauses and the unit cannot be operated The picture is stretched the aspect is The aspect setting is incorrect for the incorrect Cause Reading of data has become impos sible during DVD playback display Action See After touching W once start play back once more Select the appropriate setting for that image gt
96. 0miles 500 miles Scale 500miles 000 miles Scale 000miles 25 yards Scale 25yards 50 yards Scale 50yards 00 yards Scale OOyards Change View Mode View Mode Change View ap View Normal Map Flat Map Driver s View Driver 3D 2D Twin Map View 2D Twin 2D Split 3D Twin Map View 3D Twin 3D Split Vehicle Dynamics Route View Turns Turn View Guide View Guide Arrow Rear View Rear Back View Dynamics Meters orth Up orth Compass Heading Up Route Options Head Up Car Up Change Route Options Change Route Edit Route Rerouting Use Main Road ew Route Update Route ain Roads Take Main Roads Use Fast Route Fast Route Fastest Route Use Short Route Use Freeway Short Route Shortest Route Freeways Highways Use Ferry Ferry Ferries Use Toll Road Toll Road Payroad Avoid Freeway Avoid Highway Avoid Interstate Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries Skip Ferries Avoid Toll Road Cancel Route Avoid Tolls Avoid Pay Delete Route Cancel Guidance Route Profile Profile Cancel Waypoint Next Guidance Delete Waypoint Take Away Waypoint Following Guidance Guidance After This Traffic Information Traffic View Traffic Info Display Traffic Information Current Traffic Informa ion Display Traffic Condition Traffic Events List Event List Events Traffic Events Traffic On Route List On Route List Route List Traffic On Rout
97. 25 3 Enter a desired artist name D Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track gt Page 126 4 Sort playback order of the playlists D Sorting the playlists gt Page 126 124 5 Delete the playlist D Deleting a playlist Page 127 6 Delete the selected tracks from that playl ist D Deleting a track from the playlist gt Page 127 7 Update title information gt Assigning another candidate for title infor mation gt Page 128 8 Add the selected tracks to My Favorite gt Registering multiple tracks at a time gt Page 123 Operating the track edit mode Album playlist All items can be edited except for 5 The edited contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard disk drive Edit Track Album 1 D 2 a E A ro 4 at Genres Tak 6 7 8 My Mix playlist My Favorite playlist Only 5 6 8 can be performed Edit Track My Favorites D D PIO Sort Delete Add to Tracklists This Track My Favorites l 6 8 1 Enter a desired track title D Changing the title of the playlist or track gt Page 125 2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as a voice command for voice recognition gt Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name gt Page 125 3 Enter a desire
98. 39n 208m OAO a ai Touch the desired items to change the route calculation conditions and then touch OK Route Condition Avoid Toll Road Avoid Ferry Avoid Freeway rrk o Time restrictions be Learning Route The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears When a single route is calculated the system searches for the route that meets these condi tions as closely as possible O Asingle route is calculated in the following cases When a waypoint is set When a route is set through voice recog nition When auto reroute is carried out Items that users can operate Settings marked with an asterisk show that these are default or factory settings Route Condition This setting controls how the route should be cal culated by taking into account the time or the dis tance or the main road 34 Determine which condition takes priority for route calculation Jirasti Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to your destination as a priority S tshortl Calculate a route with the shortest distance to your destination as a priority Main Road alculate a route that passes major arterial road as a priority Avoid Toll Road This setting controls whether toll roads including toll areas should be taken into account Ks Jro alculate a route that may include toll roads including toll areas Zion Calculate a route that avoids toll r
99. 48 P 48 Settings menu Regional Settings Keyboard Hardware Menu onnection 3D Status Calibration t ps Center P 61 E LH M a Settings a Yolume Regiona ardware Defined etting Locations P 100 Restore Factory Settings P 102 P 95 P 96 P 96 P 97 P 97 207 AW IAWN ji gt 5 5 3 2 X EE Shortcut menu A O The shortcuts displayed on screen can be customized z O Items marked with an asterisk can not be removed from the shortcut menu D Changing a shortcut gt Page 49 gF Dial Favorite 1 to 5 p gt P 88 90 E fag Set My Favorites gt P 76 H A Address Book Icon Display P 48 208 Menu in the Audio Screen Audio Settings menu P 149 P 151 P 151 P 152 P 152 Woofer On Loudness Off P 152 P 153 System Settings menu Page 1 P 154 P 155 P 156 P 156 Lj HT AY Seltings Audio Sett P 157 Wide Mode P 157 P 157 P 158 System Settings menu Page 2 P 158 P 158 P 158 P 159 AY Sittings SP tui senas sys setin E d 209 AW IAWN g gt 5 5 3 2 X mm index q 5 Numerics J 10key Mode 113 10Key Search 112 196 2D Twin M
100. 6 Changes to streets highways made after that time may not be reflected in his database e It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use any part or the whole of this map in any form without permission from the copyright owner e If the local traffic regulations or conditions deviate from this data follow the local traffic egulations such as signs indications etc and conditions such as construction weather etc e The traffic regulation data used in the map database applies only to standard sized pas senger vehicles Note that regulations for larger vehicles motorbikes and other non standard vehicles are not included in the data base Copyright 1984 2007 Tele Atlas Rel 03 2006 NOTICE 2001 2007 Tele Atlas All rights reserved This mate rial is proprietary and the subject of copyright protection and other intellectual property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of selected Statistics Canada computer files under Agree ment number 6776 and is an authorized distributor of selected Geomatics Canada computer files The product includes information copied with permission from Cana dian authorities including Canada Post Corporation The use of this material is subject to the terms of a License Agreement You will be held liable for any unau thorized copying or disclosure of this material Data by Info USA 2007 All Rights Reserved Data
101. 6 30 D Grab The system becomes the same state when the battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of the navigation system is disconnected Method 2 Restore Factory Settings Clears some items in the Map menu and in the Settings menu Information Map i Regional Hardware Settings Destinati Defined Locations Background Picture Setting Yolume Restore Factory Demo Modify Mode Current an a ot D Restoring the Default Setting gt Page 102 Method 3 Reset on start up Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk drive Clear user information from hard disk Cancel gt If system errors frequently occur gt Page 181 Method 4 Clear user information from hard disk on start up Clears all user data including Music Library stored in the hard disk drive Clear user information from hard disk Reset D Completely returning the navigation system Page 181 179 AW IAYN g gt 5 k 3 2 X EE Setting items to be deleted The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method The items listed in the following table return to the default or factory settings The items not listed below will be retained However if you carry out Clear user information from hard disk all the settings related to NAVI AV Appendix the navigation function including
102. Checking the Reception Status of the XM Tuner 77 Emergency Info 77 Checking the information registered as Emer gency Info 77 Searching for car service in an emergency 79 Registering user information 80 Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 80 14 Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning Hands free Phoning Overview 83 Preparing communication devices 83 Setting up for hands free phoning 84 Receiving a phone call 86 aking a phone call 87 Transferring the phone book 89 Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites 90 Editing the entry in Phone Book 90 Editing the received call or dialed number history 92 Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Entering the Settings Menu 95 Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone 95 Customizing the Regional Settings 95 Changing the language for navigation guidance and menu 95 Setting the time difference 96 ustomizing the keyboard layout 96 hanging the unit between km and miles 97 hanging the virtual speed of the vehicle 97 ecking the Setting Related with Hardware 97 Checking the connections of leads and installa tion positions 97 Checking sensor learning status and driving C Q00 hans C status 98 orrecting the installation angle 99 Checking the device and version information 99 Checking the hard disk information 99 Registering the Home Location and Favorite Location 100 Changing the Background Picture 100 Using the
103. Current Location Background Picture Setting tems other than above v v v Learning Status Hardware 3D Calibration Status Hardware Vehicle Right and left gauge type Adjust Look v v Dynamics Audio Set All items v tings System Mute Set Clock DISP REC Mode v v v Settings Other items Vv 180 Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 usic Library Repeat Random settings v v v LIBRARY Track data v Playlis v Last playback position v XM Alert on off for My Mix v v A DVD All settings v CD All settings A ROM MP3 All settings v FM Preset memory and the other settings v AM Preset memory and the other settings v TV Preset memory and the other settings v REAR Rear Screen setting v SCREEN Others Picture Adjust v Display Tilt v If system errors frequently occur Completely returning the navi If system errors frequently occur and the power gation system to the navigation system turns off inappropriate content may have been recorded in the memory or the hard disk drive In such a case normal operations may be restored by clearing the set ting values stored in the hard disk drive For the contents that are cleared see the
104. D DVD Change To DVD Switch To DVD TV Change To TV Switch To TV Al Change To AM Switch To AM FM Change To FM Switch To FM AV Input Video Input CD CD Changer usic Library Change To Music Library Switch To Music Library usic Search Search My Music Search Music Album Search By Album Search Album Artist Search By Artist Search Artist Genre Search By Genre Search Genre Rock Pop Rock Pop Hip Hop Rap Hip Hop Rap Soul Urban Soul Urban Track Search Search By Track iPod Change To iPod Switch To iPod XM Change To XM Switch To XM Sirius Change To Sirius Switch To Sirius 175 mg Category list for vicinity search gt NAVI A Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 17 If you say without ta Category 76 ARCO CANADA Category BP A PHI name name Gas Station OCO CHEVRON CITGO CLA LLIPS 66 SHELL SINCLAIR SU Bank amp ATM he category name category ing the chain into considera itle t on RK CO he system searches for vicin ity POIs in that category OCO ESSO EXXON FINA GETTY GULF MOBIL PETRO OCO TEXACO ULTRAMAR Gas S ation Others B B amp T BANK OF AMERICA BANK OF MONTREAL BANK OF NEW YORK BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA CIBC BANK CITIBANK HS ADA MELLO SUN TRUST BA WASHINGTO B Category name American Asian exican Pizzeria Seafood S anese Category name RBY S A URGER KI UEEN DU FC C BO G NKI O x lt
105. D and 5 1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD Depending on the setting playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated 12 Specify the chapter you want to play back or the time to start playback by enter ing a number D Searching for a desired scene starting play back from a specified time gt Page 112 13 Perform the operation such as resum ing stored in the disc When using a DVD that has a point recorded that indicates where to return to the DVD returns to the specified point and begins play back from that point 14 Switch to the previous page of touch keys 15 Select the DVD menu item 112 16 Decide the item When you select a certain video item play back starts from the selected item When you select an item with a submenu the next menu screen will appear The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc For details refer to the instructions provided with disc Searching for a desired scene starting playback from a speci fied time You can search for a desired scene by specifying a title or a chapter and the time O Chapter search and time search are not possi ble when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch 10Key Search and then touch Title title Chapter chapter Time time Min Pra 4 TRator Fen Miyu Emer 2 Touch the key to input the desired num ber For titles chapters e To select 3 touc
106. If reception is poor NOK appears In such case please change the installation position of the GPS antenna 3 Phone Connection Status ndicates the connection status of the Blue ooth unit sold separately and the signal strength between the Bluetooth unit and the cellular phone If the Bluetooth unit is con nected correctly OK is displayed NOK appears when the Bluetooth unit is not con nected or incorrectly connected 4 Installation Position The installation position of the navigation sys em is shown That indicates whether the installation position of the navigation system is correct or not If installed correctly OK appears When the navigation system is installed at an extreme angle exceeding the imitation of the installing angle Incorrect angle will be displayed When the angle of he navigation system has been changed Excessive vibration will be displayed 97 IAWN i suoipuny uoljeBiaey 104 SHulyjag jesauay ayy BuiAyipow OL TE Ke h 10 be NAVI A Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions 98 5 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied On is dis played When the parking brake is released Off is displayed 6 Power Voltage The power voltage reference value provided from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys tem is shown If the voltage goes out of the range from 11 to 15 V check that power cable connection is correct 7 I
107. If there is only one let ter that could possibly follow your entry that letter will automatically be entered Alist appears if multiple options exist Select the desired one from the list and proceed to the next step In rare cases you may need to input the city name to deter mine the city Operation of state selection screen 1 ete genni adie Please Select State or Province PSRs S Te UFZ ia 2 ils AR 1 A B to U Z Use to jump to the first state province or ter ritory that starts with that letter oA y Use to see the next page or previous page of the list 3 State list Press one of these items to set it as search area 4 Back Returns previous screen Operation of street name or city name input screen e g QWERTY keyboard 8 10 a 7 1 State code key Jump to the state selection screen Selected state code is displayed 2 OK Confirms the characters displayed in 4 and proceeds to the next step 3 List Lists candidates based on yellow characters in 4 Touch the desired item in the list to pro ceed to the next step 4 Text box Displays the characters that are entered 5 Keyboard Use to enter the text 6 Back Returns previous screen 7 Ex Deletes the input text one letter at a time fr
108. Laundromat Dry C Electronics Retailer BEST BUY CIRCUIT CITY COMP USA FRY S ELECTRONICS RADIO SHACK ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS Electronics Category name COAT FACTORY COST ART STORES WAL TI EWOOD SUIT IO ER 8 TRAVELO T Category name Groceries Liquor Store Bakery Butcher Convenience Store Delicatessen Groceries Others N amp S SY SU ES HOWARD J RA DGE WINGATE Retaile UITES ADAI LAND TCO FACTORY 2 U KMA TES FAIRF r Chains Others BEST WESTER OHNSON HYATI N RED ROOF Hotel Others eaners T KNIGHTS INN LA QUINTA N RESIDENCE INNS SCOTTISH INN SHERATON RT KOHL S ROSS SAM S CLUB STEIN MART T J COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT DAYS INN DOUBLE ELD INN HAMPTON INN HILTON HILTON GARDEN INN HOLI INN MARRIOTT MOTEL O EVROLET CHRYSLER DAEWOO DODGE FORD HONDA HYUNDAI ROVER LEXUS LINCOLN MAZDA MERCEDES BENZ MITSUBISHI E SAAB SATURN SUBARU SUZUKI TOYOTA VOLKSWAGEN Category name Shopping Shopping Center Beauty amp Barber Book Store Music Store Fashion Florist Furniture Home Improvement Glass ware House amp Office Optometrist Shoes amp Bags Sporting Goods Toys Cellular Phone Shop Shopping Others Category name Entertainment Stadium amp Arena Brewery Casino Cinema Night Club Theater amp Play Winery Pub Category name Leisure Museum Art Gallery Zoo Amu
109. N ben v 2 i oO Basic Operation ay CALIFORNIA MCounry nwy Aza lf the selected street has only one matching location Route confirmation screen appears Proceed to Step 9 Touch the city or area where your destina tion is located Street COUNTY HWY A24 Gucoor r TOYALTON pm PORTOLA me VINTON When a route is not set route calculation starts immediately D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When a route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 31 O If there is no matching location the navi gation system displays The address does not exit Do you want to continue When you touch Yes a place near the specified location appears In this case pay attention to the displayed location may not be suitable for your intention If you want to try again touch No to return to the previous screen O If you did not input the house number in Step 5 the house number input screen appear after this step You should input the house number now perform Step 5 Profit E 11h27m i 553m Sa Oy si When the route calculation is completed Route confirmation screen appears Operating the street list screen 3 4 1 yy CALIFORNIA STOCKTON BOULEVARD SHERMAN WA STOCKTON BOX RD STOCKTON CHRIST SCHOOL Stockton creex no Frockton cr FORT STOCKTON DR 2 6 1 Numbe
110. OLIKE DOGLIKE Fe Ya P5 pats Bals Bil The square on the right turn inactive and the song title is excluded from the alert target Ifyou touch that again the square will turn blue and the song title is included in the alert target Switching the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for all items at once This function will be useful when you want to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the condition of each memorized song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off O When the alert setting is Alert Off GENE is displayed on the information plate Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs from the song title list 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch and hold the track you want to delete A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion O To delete all songs that are memorized touch Delete All 3 Touch Yes Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to the memorized Instant Traffic amp Weather channel by directly calling it up with the T button on the navigation unit Only one station can be memorized o This function is not available with GEX P910XM and GEX P900XM Memorize a Instant Traffic amp Weather channel 1 2 Tune into Instant Traffic amp Weather channel Press and hold the T button for two sec onds or more That Instant Traffic amp Weather ch
111. Pioneer sound vision Soul Operation Manual ENGLISH HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC Z2 Notice to all users This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle s parking brake and depending on your vehicle additional installation may be required For more information please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at 800 421 1404 The screens shown in the examples may differ from the actual screens The actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function improvements Introduction Manual Overview This manual provides important information you need to make full use of your new navigation system The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation The later sec tions describe the details of the navigation functions Chapters 10 to 16 describe how to operate the AV functions Please read these chapters when you use a disc in the built in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation sys tem How to use this manual Be sure to read the following descriptions License Agreement Page 5 to 11 This provides a license agreement of this software Be sure to read this before using the software About the Data for the Map Database Page 11 his provides the date when the Map Database was recorded Copyright Page 11 provides the copyright of the Map Datab
112. Second Maneuver Arrow gt Page 43 View Displays the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map Hide Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map Bluetooth Connected 48 Selects whether to display or hide the icon for current status of the phone connection via Bluetooth wireless technology View Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map Hide Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map D About Bluetooth Connected icon gt Page 43 Address Book Icon You can select whether to display the Address Book Icon on the map On Displays the Address Book Icon on the map Off Hides the Address Book Icon on the map O Even if Address Book Icon is set to Off the alarm sounds when you approach the registered location and the set image pops up To turn off the sound output and image pop up select No Sound and No Picture for the entry D Editing the entry in Address Book gt Page 63 3D Landmark You can select whether to display the 3D Landmark on the map TFK INTL AIRPORT O 3D Landmark only appears when the view mode is 3D Twin Map View and the map scale is set to 0 25 mile 200 m or lower On Displays the 3D Landmark on the map Off Hides the 3D Landmark on the map Selecting the Shortcut Select shortcuts to display on the map screen In the list displayed on screen the items with red checks are displayed on the map screen
113. Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Soft ware or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERV ERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under his Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier o track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without nowing anything about who you are For more informa ion see the web p
114. TRALIA PTY LTD 178 184 Boundary Road Braeside Victoria 3195 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L8R OP2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A de C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 91 78 4270 FSAI BRA Al MAR BAe ALLA Bed 4 ie SHE ian 02 2521 3588 KET SA ARAT FEJLER WIERE AR E90 1 628 ia 0852 2848 6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright 2006 by Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved Printed in China lt KKYHX gt lt 06K00000 gt lt CRB2297 A U gt UC
115. Touch the shortcut you want to display and then touch OK when a red check appears You can select up to five shortcuts 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Short Cut Selection The Short Cut Selection screen appears V4 Fp Dial Favorite 4 On this screen you can operate the following items 2 Touch the item that you want to set in the shortcut menu An item with a red check mark is displayed in the shortcut menu pa Registration Register the information on the location indi cated by the scroll cursor to the Address Book gt Registering a Location into Address Book gt Page 62 WG Vicinity Search Find POls Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor gt Finding a POI in the Vicinity Page 55 ad Overlay POI Displays icon for surrounding facilities POI on the map gt Displaying POI on the Map gt Page 50 K Volume Displays Volume Setting D Volume gt Page 95 a Phone Book Displays Phone Book D Calling a number in the Phone Book gt Page 87 gt Editing the entry in Phone Book gt Page 90 F Dial Favorite 1 to 5 Make a call to the phone number registered in Dial Favorites D Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites Page 90 pii Whole Route Overview Displays the entire route currently set D Checking the entire route overview on the map gt Page 36 S Stock Info Displa
116. USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE NSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUP PLIER S SUPPLIERS AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLI ERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH AR ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 9 IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PROD UCTS INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS TO THE AUTHO RIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non transferable nonex clusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products the Software and the related documentation solely for your own per sonal use or for internal use by your business only on such Pioneer products You shall not copy reverse engineer translate port modify or make derivative works of the Soft ware You shall not loan rent disclose publish sell assign lease sublicense market or other wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive
117. Vicinity Searching for the facilities around the current position You can search for Points Of Interest in your sur roundings Use this function to find a POI to visit during a journey Searching range is approxi mately 10 miles 16 km square from the current location 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search The list of POI categories appears 2 Touch the desired category Category Previously set categories will have a red check mark When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected blue check marks will appear OK Start search with the selected category Back Returns to the previous screen Set Displays the screen for registering POI short cuts D Registering deleting POI Shortcuts gt Page 58 O Ifyou touch one of the POI shortcuts e g BE before selecting a category on the ist you can start searching for facilities directly by the category registered on the POI shortcut O Ifyou want to search for facilities by using both marked category and POI shortcuts select some categories in the list and then ouch the POI shortcut to start searching 55 5 uoneunsaq sno 0 jnoy e Buas EEESC NAVI ql ow uw v Q oO Setting a Route to Your Destination 56 Touch Select Detail Select All Deselect All lt Select Detail Select All Selects all detailed categories that
118. Your Home and Your Favorite right hand side of the location displays the Edit ai Location gt Page 61 registered information screen 3 Address Book entry a Touch to calculate the route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation 4 ea menu then touch Address Book 2 Amap OPH au Cat en can be displayed 2 Touch EZ on the right hand side ofthe gt Checking the location on the map location that you want to edit the informa Ei age 31 tion for 2 ET m The information related to that place can be M prommsiatos edited prone s a gt Editing the entry in Address Book gt 3 2 a 63 NAVI i Chapter 6 Registering and Editing Locations 1 Name You can enter the desired name 2 Pronunciation You can enter the desired pronunciation inde pendently from the name The registered pro nunciation is used for voice recognition O If nothing is entered in the text box you O Depending on which language is being switched to you may not be able to use the registered pronunciation without modifica tion D Available Voice Commands gt Page 167 3 Phone The phone number of the registered location You can dial this number by using 8 O You can search by registered telephone number 4 Icon The symbol displayed on the map and Address Book O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map gt Addre
119. a touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the location Location screen B Set As Destination Set As Waypont Display Map Next Previous The following commands can be vocalized Set As Destination Same as above o Q iy oO Set As Waypoint Same as above Display Map Same as above Next See the next POI Previous See the previous POI Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 172 Other Voice Commands The navigation system also can recognize the words in the following list Other voice commands for navigation operation Preferential voice command Other voice command Back Return Before Cancel Escape Skip Current Location y Location Voice Help Recognition Help Help Next Page ext Following Previous Page Back Page Basic Operation Basics Basic Set As Destination Set Go Route To Destination Begin Guidance Start Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint Waypoint Registration Register Store Destination Go To Search POI Point Of Interest Points Of Interest Business Listing Address Addresses Address Search Search By Address Area Surrounding Around Telephone Number Address Book Telephone Phone Number Registered Points My Addresses Search By Address Book Destination History Search History Destination List Vicinity Search Return Home Vicinity Search Around Search In Vicinity Go Home Dri
120. a POI icon or traffic infor mation icon Place the scroll cursor over the icon to view the detailed information 1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor to the icon you want to view 2 Information for a specified location appears Address Book Information PERSHING SQUARE LOS ANGELES The information shown varies according to the location There may be no information for that location D Registering places gt Page 61 D Displaying facilities POI icon on the map Page 50 gt Icons for traffic information gt Page 70 o appears when the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected to the navi gation system together with the cellular phone By touching B you can make a phone call to the displayed phone num ber D Dialing from the map gt Page 89 3 Touch Back Returns to the previous display 4 Touch gN Returns to the map of your surroundings You can also return to the map of your sur roundings by pressing the MAP button Shortcut menu Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks such as route calculation for the location indi cated by the scroll cursor or registering a location in Address Book faster than using the naviga tion menu You can customize the shortcuts displayed onscreen The shortcuts described here are pre pared as the default setting D Changing a shortcut gt Page 49 O When the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected to the nav
121. a Pioneer external unit is connected with an IP BUS cable select EXT When the audio source is EXT the Video image of the Pioneer external unit can be displayed Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with the navigation system as the one of sources Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equip ment connected to the navigation system 1 Touch AUX Input in the System Set tings menu Touching AUX Input switches between On and Off D Selecting AUX as the source gt Page 147 Switching the muting attenua tion timing You can mute the audio source volume or attenu ate the output signal This setting is invalid for the mute signal has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit Even if this setting is Off the navigation system will mute or attenuate the audio source volume when the signal is output via MUTE lead 1 Touch Mute Set in the System Settings menu Each touch of Mute Set changes the set tings as follows e Guide Tel VR The volume is muted or attenuated according to the following con ditions When the navigation outputs the guidance voice When you use a cellula tooth technology dialing call When the voice recognition mode is acti vated Tel VR The volume is muted or attenu ated according to the following conditions When you use a cellular phone via Blue tooth te
122. acenote Database included in the hard disk drive are not 100 guaranteed The Gracenote Database included in the hard disk drive contains the titles for the 300 000 most frequently accessed albums worldwide as of November 2006 Table of Contents Introduction Manual Overview How to use this manual 1 Overview for each chapter 2 Terminology 4 About the definition of terminology 4 Color difference of the map display between day and night 4 License Agreement 5 PIONEER AVIC Z2 for U S A 5 PIONEER AVIC Z2 for Canada 7 Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data 9 About the Data for the Map Database 11 Copyright 11 About Gracenote 11 End User License Agreement 12 Other Precautions 12 Table of Contents 13 Chapter 1 Before Using the System Important Safety Information 19 Additional Safety Information 20 To ensure safe driving 20 Features Characteristics of this software 21 About XM NavTraffic Service and Pioneer avigation 22 Notes for Hard Disk Drive 22 Recording equipment and copyright 22 Notes when writing data to the hard disk drive at ow temperature 23 Points about recording 23 Data saved or recorded by the customer 23 Failure to operate 23 After sales service for Pioneer products 23 Visit Our Website 23 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Flow from Startup to Termination 25 How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26 Displaying the Navigation menu 26 Navigation menu overview 26
123. ading this chapter please also refer to the oper S S S S tr S p o hows which repeat range has been selected 5 Track number indicator hows the track currently playing 6 Track title indicator hows the title of the track currently playing 7 Play time indicator hows the elapsed playing time of the current ack 8 Disc number display hows the number of the disc in the multi CD ayer The titles of the items marked with an asterisk will be displayed only when the CD TEXT disc is used When using a normal music CD they are displayed as Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch M CD to select the multi CD player When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys m 3 4 5 a When the multi CD player has performed the preparatory operations Ready is displayed If the multi CD player does not operate prop erly an error message such as Error XX may be displayed Refer to the multi CD player owner s manual f there are no discs in the multi CD player magazine No Disc is displayed 139 AL POd G9 IN 824n0g Ay 94 Buisn EAA 1 dey mmm 1 Change the disc in the magazine gt lt Chapter 14 Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and
124. adlight are on When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the built in nighttime These are switched automati DVD drive nothing is output cally depending on the vehicle s head O When AV is selected the following restric lights are on or off ions are applied to Rear display g You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the The Video image and sound are output source without a video and navigation map only when the AV INPUT has both video and display sound O The setting contents can be memorized The Video image and sound are output separately for the following screen and the m when the appropriate setting on AV Video image Input is Video AM FM M CD iPod AUX XM SIRIUS screen Operating the picture adjust LIBRARY Music Library screen ment Built in DVD drive TV image Rear view camera image e For safety reasons these functions are not Navigation map and menu screen available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route see page 20 for details O The picture adjustment may not be avail able with some rear view cameras O Because of the LCD screen characteris tics you may not be able to adjust the screen at low temperatures m You can adjust the picture for each source and 2 Touch or to adjust the desired pa rear view camera item 2 Each ti t i kW 1 Pr
125. age for the Gracenote Privacy Policy or the Gracenote MusiclID Service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warranties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in he Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change icient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninter rupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to dis continue its online services at any time 12 GRACENOTE DISC LAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRA TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FIT data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems suf NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTA OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE O SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INC FRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT NED BY YOUR USE R ANY GRACENOTE OTE BE LIABLE DENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Gracenote 2006 Other Precautions Version 2 2 e Part of the data cannot be acquired The con tents of the data in the Gr
126. alert to the teams in advance 1 Touch Game Alert The League Team Setting screen appears 2 Touch Next or Previous to select the league 3 Touch Next or Previous to select the team 4 Touch On Off The team displayed as On is the alert target TiPrevioes previous Phiart on Alert or 5 Touch Alert On O When the selected team is excluded from the alert target the team is displayed as Off Up to 12 teams can be selected When you have already made 12 team selections Full is displayed and additional team selection is not possible In this case first delete the team selection and then try again Switching the Game Alert on or off You can enable or disable the alert for selected items This function will be useful when to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the set ting of each selected team 1 Touch Game Alert The League Team Setting screen appears 135 gt SNIUIS IWX 84Nog AY 24 Buisn EAN TE Teh 11 be EE 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off gt lt Chapter 13 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS O When the alert setting is Alert Off is displayed on the information plate When a game involving team is broad cast A message is displayed Touch Jump to switch to that station and you can view to that game information If you touch Stay the channel does not switch O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navig
127. ani az 0126 Bashkir ba 0201 Belorussian be 0205 Bulgarian bg 0207 Bihari bh 0208 Bislama bi 0209 Bengali Bangla bn 0214 Tibetan bo 0215 Breton br 0218 Catalan ca 0301 Corsican co 0315 Czach cs 0319 Welsh cy 0325 Danish da 0401 Bhutani dz 0426 Esperanto eo 0515 Estonian et 0520 Basque eu 0521 Persian fa 0601 Finnish fi 0609 Fiji fj 0610 Faroese fo 0615 Frisian fy 0625 Irish ga 0701 Scottish Gaelic gd 0704 Galician gl 0712 Guarani gn 0714 Gujarati gu 0721 Hausa ha 0801 Hindi hi 0809 Croatian hr 0818 Hungarian hu 0821 Armenian hy 0825 nterlingua ia 0901 nterlingue ie 0905 nupiak ik 0911 ndonesian in 0914 celandic is 0919 Hebrew iw 0923 Yiddish ji 1009 Javanese jw 1023 Georgian ka 1101 azakh kk 1111 Greenlandic kl 1112 Cambodian km 1113 annada kn 1114 ashmiri ks 1119 urdish ku 1121 irghiz ky 1125 Latin la 1201 Lingala In 1214 Laotian lo 1215 Lithusnian It 1220 Latvian Lettish Iv 1222 alagasy mg 1307 ori mi 1309 cedonian mk 1311 ayalam ml 1312 ngolian mn 1314 davian mo 1315 rathi mr 1318 ay ms 1319 altese mt 1320 Burmese my 1325 auru na 1401 epali ne 1405 orwegian no 1415 Occitan oc 1503 Oromo om 1513 Oriya or 1518 Panjabi pa 1601 Polish pl 1612 9 w oO M DM wD Pashto Pushto
128. annel will be memorized O The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem orized newly although the channel 001 is the default O Even if you use the SIRIUS satellite radio tuner together only one station can be memorized The station memorized after ward will overwrite the existing one Calling up the memorized Instant Traf fic amp Weather channel 1 Press the T button O You can call up a Instant Traffic amp Weather channel even from a source other than the XM source g To cancel the announcement touch TREC Off on the screen or press the T button again Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio You can use the navigation system to control a SIRIUS satellite digital tuner which is sold sepa rately For details concerning operation refer to the SIRIUS tuner s operation manuals This sec tion provides information on SIRIUS operations with the navigation system which differs from that described in the SIRIUS tuner s operation manual m The following functions are not available in SIR PNR1 Selecting team for game alert Displaying game information Using the song alert function Using the direct traffic announcement function Selecting SIRIUS as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch SIR IUS D For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration 1 4 3 1 Source icon Shows w
129. anually or try to retrieve the title by touching Update title All artist names in the playl ist have been deleted because no character has been entered Do you want f you try to delete the artist name entirely The artist will not be displayed in the artist group and artist name on he information plate also will not be dis If you enter the artist name again the artist name appears to proceed played Other sources Message When What to do Search failed iPod is preparing playback Wait until Ready disappears and try the Therefore the operation is invalid now operation Invalid command the e If you try to memorize 000 Channel to Tune an appropriate channel and memo memo has not been stored y Mix rize it e If you try to memorize a channel that is OFF AIR to My Mix e If you try to memorize a channel to My ix while an XM tuner error occurs Invalid command the CH has not been stored e If you try nel to T button s preset e If you try to memorize a channel that is OFF AIR to T button s preset e If you try to memorize a channel to T button s preset while an XM tuner error occurs o memorize 000 or 001 Chan Tune an appropriate channel and memo rize it 197 mm When the hard disk drive is dis NAVI AV 2s 3 o 2 2 lt connected f there is no hard disk drive because of repair or service you can operate only the Radio source w
130. ap View 40 3D detection 98 3D hybrid mode 184 192 3D Hybrid Sensor 183 202 3D Landmark 48 3D POI 40 3D Twin Map View 40 5 1ch setting 159 A Active touch key 27 Address Book 58 61 62 63 66 88 202 Address Book entry 61 63 Address Book Icon 48 Address Search 28 Album group 120 Albums 120 121 AM 115 angle icon 154 Artist group 120 Artists 120 122 Aspect ratio 154 202 assist subtitles 154 Audio 103 audio language 112 Audio operation screen 103 105 Audio Settings 105 149 209 auto antenna 158 Auto fill in function 29 Auto Reroute 21 199 auto service 79 AUX 147 AUX Input 147 157 AV Background 100 AV Guide Mode 51 AV Input 145 156 AV Setting 105 149 Average Speed 97 Avoid Ferry 34 Avoid Freeway 34 Avoid Toll Road 34 Appendix B Background Picture 100 Backlight 160 best stations memory 114 116 210 Bit rate 108 202 Bluetooth Connected icon 43 Bluetooth unit 43 83 BSM 114 116 BSSM 144 Business card 89 c Cancel Route 33 CD 106 118 158 CD DA 109 CD R RW 91 100 101 CD TEXT 106 117 cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech nology 83 hapter 111 202 clock display 158 Close Up View 41 47 Connecting icon 86 Contacts 89 Current location 33 42 202 Current location key 44 Q D dead reckoning 183 184 Default or Factory Setting 179 180 181 Demo Mode 102 Destination 42 202 Destination History 58
131. appears Touch Registration Phone Settings Connection Registration Device Name PIONEER HOO NAVI Password rrr OK Touch Navi The system searches for cellular phones with Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list Wait until your cellular phone appears in the list If you cannot find the cellular phone you want to connect check that the cellular phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless technology connection Select the cellular phone you want to reg ister from the list Enter the password of the navigation sys tem to register it using your cellular phone After the registration is completed the follow ing screen appears My mobile phonel 00126282F7F8 O If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning If a connection still cannot be established try connecting using your cellular phone Operating from your cellular phone 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol ogy on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction manual of your cellular phone Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears Touch Registration Phone Settings Connection Registration Device Name PIONEER HOO NAVI Pas
132. arks such as or for file name finalize the CD R RW with Joliet Unicode format g Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944 pix els can be used We cannot guarantee proper operation for a picture bigger than this size O After changing a set image that was imported from a CD R RW you must use the CD R RW where the image is recorded to restore the previous Splash Screen Precautions when changing the Splash Screen The following is the default Splash Screen for the Navigation System PIONEER Original If an image other than the one shown above is previously set such as an image from the dealer or other source and you change the Splash Screen once you must use the CD R RW where the image is recorded to change the screen back to this image Using the Demonstration Guid ance This is a demonstration function for shops After a route is set the simulation of the route guid ance to a destination is automatically displayed Normally set this to Off 102 Touch Settings in the navigation menu 2 Touch Demo Mode to change the set ting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting On Repeat demo drive Off default Demo Mode is set off Correcting the Current Location Touch the screen to adjust the current position and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Modify Current Location 2 Scroll
133. arm sounds when you approach the registered location and the set image pops up regardless of whether Address Book Icon is set to Off This is a normal operation and nota malfunction To turn off the sound output and image pop up select No Sound and No Picture 189 ___ i Symptom NAVI AV Appendix Slope is not displayed on the Vehi cle Dynamics screen Inclination does not move on the 3D Calibra tion Status screen Cause The speed pulse lead is not con nected Action See Connect the speed pulse lead o sound no voice Guide Mute has been set or sound volume is reduced to 0 Adjust the volume of t turn Guide Mute off Refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone gt Page 95 e guidance or The person on the other end of the tion due to an echo phone call cannot hear the conversa The voice from the person on the other end of the phone call is output from the speakers and then picked up by the microphone again creat ing an echo Use the following methods to reduce the echo Lower the volume on the receiver Have both speakers pause slightly before speaking The registered phone cannot be deleted Normally the registered phone can not be deleted e Overwrite the old registered phone with a new phone e Clear Phone Settings by refer ring to Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Sett
134. as guide O If there are multiple pages voice help menu can be switched by using BEE or EEE on the screen You can also switch the page by saying Next page or Previ ous page O You can also search the track in the cur rent playlist by saying Track Search Available Voice Commands This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation AW IAWN fi O When Language in Regional Settings is changed to another language the commands that you registered can be used only if the language is the same O For lt City Name gt lt Street Name gt lt House number gt shown on the following chart say the real name or number which you want to search for For example if the real city name is Long Beach and you want to operate Search by address say Long Beach instead of lt City Name gt g For lt POI Name gt shown on the following chart say the real POI name that you want to search for For example if the real POI name is San Francisco International Airport and you want to operate Go to lt POI Name gt say Go to San Francisco International Airport or Go to SFO You can vocalize lt POI Name gt included in the following categories only Railway Station City Center Airport Ferry Terminal Airline Access Golf Courses Shopping Cen er Parks and Recreation Area O For lt Registered location s pronunciation gt shown on
135. ase About Gracenote Page 11 This provides a license agreement and copyright of the Gracenote music recognition service Be sure to read this before using this navigation system Finding the operation procedure from what you want to do When you have decided what you want to do you can find the page you need from the Table of Con tents Finding the operation procedure from a menu name If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen you will find the necessary page from the Display Information at the end of the manual Glossary See the glossary to find the meaning of a term Index The section at the end of this manual provides an index See each term to find the main pages where it is stated Overview for each chapter 0O CO nN OD OI amp S GW N Before Using the System For safety reasons it is particularly important that you fully understand your naviga tion system before using it Be sure to read this chapter Basic Operation Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immediately It will explain the basics of this system This section describes the basic operations for navigation How to Read the Map Display This section describes how to read the map screen and the method of changing map view or map scale Modifying Map Configurations The behavior of your navigation system depends on the map display and guidance settings If you
136. ass filter HPF set ting turns Off D Using the high pass filter gt Page 152 Adjusting a position effect You can select a listener position that you want to make as the center of sound effects 1 Touch Staging in the Audio Settings menu 2 Touch Position 3 Touch desired position Using balance adjustment You can select a fader balance setting that pro vides an ideal listening environment in all occu pied seats 1 Touch FAD BAL in the Audio Settings menu The FAD BAL screen appears When Rear SP the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu is Sub w the Balance will be displayed instead of FAD BAL D Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller Page 158 2 Touch 4 or Y to adjust front rear speaker balance Each time you touch A or Y moves the front rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear Front 15 to Rear 15 is displayed as the front rear speaker balance moves from front to rear 151 gt lt lensi A olpny y im payejas Bulyjag olpny y Bulziwoysng Q gt w xo O z wil Chapter 16 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual When the rear output setting is Rear SP Sub w you cannot adjust front rear speaker balance D Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller gt Page 158 3 Touch lt or to adjust left right speaker balance Each time you touch lt or gt moves the left
137. ata source is not providing data e g scheduled or unscheduled downtime or has not been updated or if there is a time lag between the time when the original data source is updated and when you receive the updated XM NavTraffic data O Depending on the amount of data being trans mitted in your area it may take several min utes to display all of the available data O The information content depends on the infor mation provided by XM NavTraffic Service including data refreshing and availability tim O Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the accuracy of the information transmitted Q v ioneer does not bear responsibility for hanges to information services provided by such as cancellation of the services or ubscription updates oH axxo affic information is not taken into account when calculating estimated time of arrival time or travel time for your destination Notes for Hard Disk Drive Recording equipment and copy right Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check care fully what defines lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy Copying of copy right material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or con sented to by the right owners Notes when writing data to the hard disk drive at low tempera ture Writing to the hard disk drive such as recor
138. ation istered location or a POI icon from the map system you can browse the data in the trans screen ferred phone book on the screen of the navigation system You can also select the entries in the phone book to make a call from the navigation system or edit the data on the navigation system You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data 1 Scroll the map and place the cursor on an O Depending on the cellular phone Phone icon on the map Book may be called a name such as Con acts Business card or something else O The Phone Book can hold a total of 400 O entries S xo O The Hands free phoning connection is discon fig nected to establish the connection for phone book transfer When the phone book is trans erred hands free phoning is reconnected c automatically Z ne detail Soler appears O The phone book of this navigation system can F 3 Touch WA to make a call not assign the multiple telephone numbers for a To cancel the call after the system starts dial OnE PEIRONS NAMIE S ing touch 1 Connect your cellular phone featuring z 4 To end the call touch gy at the top right Bluetooth wireless technology of the screen gt Registering your cellular phone gt 2 Page 84 2 Touch Information in the Navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch Read Bus Card If there is a phone book already transferred the following screen ap
139. ation system Displaying game information Game Info You can display the game information of a team that you have set an alert for and change to the broadcast channel O This function is unavailable if no team is selected in the game alert function 1 Touch Game Info The game name and the broadcast channel are also displayed 2 Touch Next or Previous to view the game score information which is regis tered g The game score will be updated automati cally O Touch Tune To to switch to the channel that broadcasts the displayed game g Ifyou have not made any team selections Not Set is displayed O When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing No Game is dis played Using My Mix function My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being received When the track that matches the memorized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song 136 Atrack itself is NOT downloaded ONLY the song title and the artist name are memorized Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song The song title and artist name of the current song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix 1 Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized and Son
140. ce screen currently O Touch Back to return to the AV Settings screen Customizing the Audio Settings Items Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as desired 149 1ensiA olpny y im payejas Bulyjag olpny ay Bulziwoysng Qa gt w xo O oz HE Recalling equalizer curves izer curve settings will be memorized in A There are six stored equalizer curves which you Custom1 can easily recall Here is a list of the equalizer e A Custom2 curve can be created common to curves all sources If you make adjustments when the Custom2 curve is selected the Custom2 curve will be updated Super Bass f l Super Bass is a curve in which only low range is O The adjusted Custom curve is memorized boosted for each of the source selected but one curve Powerful Default i is shared for the following sources Powerful is a curve in which low range and high AM and FM range sounds are boosted an Natural EXT 1 and EXT 2 Natural is a curve in which low range and high range AUX and AV INPUT sounds are slightly boosted In the built in DVD drive different curves can Vocal be memorized for a DVD Video and a CD CD Vocal is a curve in which the mid range sounds such DA or MP3 as the human vocal range are boosted E Flat You can adjust the center frequency level and Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is b
141. channel even from a source other than the SIRIUS source O To cancel the announcement touch TRFC Off on the screen or press the T button again 137 gt lt SNIUIS NX 84nog AY 24 Buisn EAN 1 dey I 81 serdeyo SNIUIS NX 21N0S AY 34 Bush 138 Chapter 14 Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to he navigation system using IP BUS or AV BUS such equipment can be operated from the navi gation system This chapter describes the opera ion of the audio source that can be used when he Pioneer audio equipment is connected When ation manual of the AV equipment connected to he navigation system Operating the Multi CD Player You can use the navigation system to control a multi CD player which is sold separately O Only those functions described in this manual are available for multi CD player Depending on the multi CD player the function may be invalid Selecting M CD as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch M CD D For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration D ODD O D Fav sottings FE rite 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the disc currently playing 4 Playback method indicator e
142. chnology dialing talking incoming call When the voice recognition mode is acti vated phone via Blue alking incoming e Off The volume does not change O Operation returns to normal when the cor respond action is ended O The navigation voice guidance itself can not be attenuated or muted If you want to mute the navigation guidance voice tem porarily use KIE on the navigation map screen Switching the muting attenua tion level You can select the muting attenuation level of Mute Set This setting is also effective for a mute signal that has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit O This menu is not available in the following cases Audio source is OFF During muting attenuation 5 1Ch Setup is On 1 Touch Mute Level in the System Set tings menu Each touch of Mute Level changes the set tings as follows All The volume becomes 0 e 20dB The volume becomes 1 10 e 10dB The volume becomes 1 3 g When you select All Mute is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible during the sound is turned off O When you select 20dB or 10dB no audio adjustments except volume control are possible during the sound is attenu ated O Operation returns to normal when the cor respond action is ended O Even when a mute signal has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit navigation voice guid a
143. city enabling recording of multiple movies on a single disc If for example one disc contains three separate movies they are divided into title 1 title 2 and title 3 This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func tions 203 mmm Tracking NAVI AV Appendix arks on the map indicating the route you have traveled TV system NTSC PAL SECAM Different areas of the world use different TV systems orth America uses NTSC Europe uses PAL and SECAM and South America uses PAL M PAL N PAL and NTSC Almost all are incompatible with each other To display he video image such as TV or DVD video correctly you may need to coordinate your system at the same TV sys em or use a multisystem equipment VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate Generally speaking CBR constant bit rate is more widely used But by flexi bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression it is possible to achieve compression prior ity sound quality Voice guidance The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in guidance mode Voice recognition The technology that allows the system to understand the driver s voice commands Waypoint A location that you choose to visit before your destina tion a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints and the destination 204 Display Information Navigation menu Destination menu P 28 P 57 61 P 57 61 P 53 P 34 Cas ES Des jinati
144. ck e If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some reason it is recommended that the pulse generator ND PG1 sold separately be used When you attempt to watch Video image while driving the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohib ited will appear on the screen To watch Video image on this display stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake Rear view camera and Rear View mode With an optional rear view camera you are able o use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on trailers or to back into a tight parking spot A WARNING e SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED e USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE Features Characteristics of this z software Touch panel key operation It is possible to operate the navigation functions and the Audio functions by using touch panel keys Variety of View Modes Various types of screen display can be selected for navigation guidance ht ett ven el View Mode Selection 7 Map Modo Guide Modo Routo View l Driver s Viow ib Twin Map MED Twin Map M Vehicte View vi iow Dynamics ca m C A CAUTION The rear view mode is to use the naviga tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers or while backing up D
145. cordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit However since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard it may not be possible to play the CD side with this navigation system Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc Serious scratches can lead to playback prob lems on this navigation system In some cases a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject To prevent this we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this navigation system Please refer to the manufacturer for more detailed information about Dual Discs CD R CD RW discs When CD R CD RW discs are used playback is possible only for discs that have been final ized It may not be possible to play back CD R CD RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics scratches or dirt on the disc or dirt scratches or condensation on the lens of this product Playback of discs recorded on a personal com puter may not be possible depending on the environment and the application settings Please record with the correct format Fo 200 ayback of discs recorded on a personal com details contact the manufacturer of the appli cation Playback of CD R CD RW discs may become impossible with direct exposure to s
146. creen Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track You can rename the artist name in the playlist or track 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Artist 3 Touch Select from history List Keyboard Input The character input screen appears and you 4 Select an artist name from the list The artist name is changed to the one you selected In the playlist edit mode touching Yes changes the artist name to the one you selected Sorting the playlists The playback order of playlists in the group can be changed O If there is only one playlist the playback order cannot be changed 1 Enter the playlist edit mode gt Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 126 can change the artist name with the keyboard 2 Touch Sort Playlists 3 Touch the playlist that you want to change the order for 3 01 sound vision soul 2 The worlds frst 3 Comming gener ation 14 06 01 01 1250 n 205 Act as guide 4 Touch R M FY or to determine the position you want to put PE L01 sound vision soul 02 The world s frst 03 Comming gener ation 04 05 01 01 1250 05 Act as guide 02 The world s frst 03 Comming gener ation PME L01 sound vision soul 04 05 01 01 1250 05 Act as guide Moves playlists by page FR bki Moves playlists one by one 5 Touch the selected playlist again Th
147. ct to Canadian Data only a No Creation of Mailing Lists You are prohibited from using the POls i to create mailing lists or ii for other such similar uses oO Compliance You will use the POls in compliance with all appli cable federal and regulations c Indemnification You shal ity which users fai and regu ure to co d Warranty LIM e POls Segregation You are prohibited from combi the POls with any other POI data The POls shal sepa at al 9 Mis This is betwee matter cellaneous n addition to the Wa Agreement YOU UNDERSTAND THAT THE POIS ARE LICENSED WITHOUT GUARA OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUD TATION ANY EXPRESS OR WARRANTIES OF ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE State and local laws rules indemnify and hold infoUSA Inc harmless against all third party claims or liabil are based in whole or in part of the mply with such laws rules lations or which result from the use of he POls through you ranties contained in the ON AN AS IS BASIS TEE AND THERE ARE NO MADE WHETHER NG WITHOUT MPLIED TY OR FIT MERCHANTABIL be maintained in such a wa ning or merging y that they are ra times he exclusive othing int joint ve tionship between laws of and you consent ern Dis nture partne Te sh ot ifo California trict of Ca ely identifiable from all o n Tel
148. ctly AV Operation gt Change Band gt Switching the band peration for XM SIRIUS tuner AV Operation Preset 1 to Preset 6 Switching to that preset station directly AV Operation gt Change Band gt Switching the band AV Operation Category Mode gt Switching to the Category mode A A AW IAWN i Operation gt All Channel Mode gt Switching to the All Channel mode Operation gt Memo gt Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to My Mix peration for CD Operation gt Change Media gt Switching the CD DA part and CD ROM MP3 part peration for Music Library AV Operation gt Music Search gt Album gt lt A lbum Playlist name gt Playback the selected album playlist AV Operation gt Music Search gt lt A lbum Playlist name gt Playback the selected album playlist Note 2 AV Operation gt Music Search gt Artist gt lt Artist Playlist name gt Playback the selected artist playlist AV Operation gt Music Search gt lt Artist Playlist name gt Playback the selected artist playlist Note 2 AV Operation gt Music Search gt Genre gt lt Genre name gt gt Playback the selected genre playlist A A P A D Operation Music Search gt lt Genre name gt Playback the selected genre playlist Note 2 Operation Music Search gt My Favorites gt My Favorite 1 My Favorite 2 My Favorite 3
149. d AV INPUT ANT Radio Qa gt w xo oO O Touch or to move to the next or previous page Camera ensi A Olpny YIM poyejas Buljjag olpny ay Bulziwoysng Polarity O Touch ESC to return to the selected source screen g To return to the previous screen touch Back 153 EEE Setting up the built in DVD gt lt Chapter 16 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual drive You can change the preference for playing a DVD on the built in DVD drive You can use this menu to change audio subtitle parental lock and other DVD settings Some changes or settings which you have set here may be invalid depending on the features of he DVD disc For details see the disc s instruc ions You can enter this menu while DVD is selected as audio source g Ifyou can enter this menu during DVD play back playback will be stopped and return to the first chapter Setting the language You can set each desired language for subtitle audio and menu If the selected language is recorded on the DVD subtitles audio and menu are displayed in that language 1 Switch the audio source to DVD 2 Touch DVD V Setup in the System Set tings menu 3 Touch Subtitle Language Audio Lan guage or Menu Language Each language menu is displayed and the cur rently set language is selected 4 Touch the desired language When you select Others
150. d a band command Touch to send a band command to the external unit Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases the external unit may not respond 3 Send a 1 key to 6 key command D Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6 key Page 146 4 Operate the external unit by using Func tion 1 to Function 4 key and Auto Manual key D Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function 4 gt Page 146 gt Switching the automatic and manual func tion gt Page 147 Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6 key The external unit can be operated by transmitting the operating commands set to 1 key 6 key 146 1 Touch 1 6 2 Touch desired key 1 6 to operate the external unit O To return to the previous screen touch Back O Operation varies depending on the exter nal unit connected In some cases some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function 4 The external unit can be operated by transmitting the operating commands set to Function 1 Function 4 O The operating commands set to Function 1 Function 4 vary depending on the external unit 1 Touch Function 2 Touch Function 1 2 3 or 4 The operation command is transmitted to the external unit O Some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key
151. d artist name D Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track Page 126 4 Change genre D Changing the genre of a track gt Page 128 5 Change the order to play back tracks gt Sorting the tracks in My Mix My Favorite playlist Page 127 6 Delete the current track gt Deleting the current track gt Page 127 7 Update track title information gt Assigning another candidate for title infor mation gt Page 128 8 Add the track to My Favorite gt Register tracks one by one gt Page 122 Changing the title of the playlist or track You can change titles of playlists or tracks The titles changed here are displayed on the screen 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode D Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Title 3 Touch Yes The content to be changed in Step 4 can be reflected to the voice command No Proceeds to the next step without registering it as a voice command 4 Enter a new character string and then touch OK Touch Small to enter lowercase letters Touch Caps to enter uppercase letters Touch to toggle the selection The system pronounces the character string once and the pronunciation confirmation message appears No Completes the edit without editing the pro nunciation Repeat You can listen to the pronunciation again O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired on
152. d in theatres OO po ey DIGITAL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trade marks of Dolby Laboratories 202 DTS This stands for Digital Theatre Systems DTS is a sur round system delivering multi channel audio from up to 6 independent channels S dts Digital Out DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trade marks of DTS Inc Favorite Location A frequently visited location such as your workplace or a relative s home that you can register to allow easy routing GPS Global Positioning System A network of satellites that provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes Gracenote Music recognition service Music recognition technology and related data are pro vided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com e cenote gt gracenote Guidance mode The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your destination the system automatically switches to this mode as soon as a route has been set Guidance point These are important landmarks along your route gener ally intersections The next guidance point along your route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon Home location Your registered home location ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track related information in a MP3 file This embedded inf
153. d the basics of using the navigation system 1 Press the MENU button to display the navigation menu 2 Touch Destination in the navigation menu 3 Touch Address Search Select the method for searching the destina tion Route Overview Sa Cancet 4 Touch State code key to select the state province or territory lf the destination is in another state this changes the state setting O Once the state has been selected you only have to change states when your destina tion is outside of the state that you selected State code key Selected state The input text is deleted one letter at a time from the end of the text Continuing to touch the button deletes all of the text Back Returns you to the previous screen 28 5 Input the house number and touch OK Touch the characters you want to input g You can also input a prefix to the house number O Touching OK with no input allows you to specify and search for the name of the street city or area first Input the street name When the options are narrowed down to six or less a list of the matching streets automati cally appears When you enter the same characters that were entered previously the system automati cally displays the characters that follow the entered characters Auto fill in function O When entering the characters the system will automatically search the database for all possible options
154. ding music to the music library may be disabled when the navigation system detects abnormally low temperatures inside the vehicle Functionality will become available once the temperature inside the vehicle returns to normal Additionally if the low temperature continues for a long time the system may be booted up with the preliminary mode because the system can not recognise the hard disk drive D When the hard disk drive is disconnected gt Page 198 Points about recording O Pioneer does not compensate for the contents that could not be recorded or any loss of recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of the navigation system O The data recorded on the navigation system is not allowed to be used without permission from its right holder under copyright law except for personal entertainment O Make sure to check the recording operation tents after recording O Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs Data saved or recorded by the customer O The data saved or recorded onto this naviga tion system by the customer cannot be extracted from the navigation system and those services cannot be accepted O The data saved or recorded onto this naviga tion system by the customer cannot be guar anteed during repair or service Lost data that was saved or recorded by the customer is not guaranteed O Due to copyrights the music data recorded into the Music Library cannot be backed up during repair or servic
155. ds on your vehicle model In some cases it is impossible to make a connection to it and in such a case we recommend that the ND PG1 speed pulse generator sold separately be used How do GPS and dead reckon ing work together For maximum accuracy your navigation system continually compares GPS data with your esti mated position as calculated from the data of 3D Hybrid Sensor However if only the data from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period positioning errors are gradually compounded until the estimated position becomes unreliable For this reason whenever GPS signals are avail able they are matched with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved accuracy To ensure maximum accuracy the dead reckon ing system learns with experience By comparing he position it estimates with your actual position as obtained using GPS it can correct for various ypes of error such as tire wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle As you drive the dead reckoning system gradually gathers more data earns more and the accuracy of its estimates gradually increases So after you have driven some distance you can expect your position as shown on the map to show fewer errors 184 O Ifyou use chains on your wheels for winter driving or put on the spare wheel errors may suddenly increase because of difference in wheel diameter The system detects the fact that the tire dia
156. e before recording and check the recorded con Failure to operate Should the navigation system fail to operate prop erly contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer service facility products panies listed below U S A Pioneer Electronics USA Inc CUSTOMER SUP PORT DIVISION P O Box 1760 Long Beach CA 90801 1760 800 421 1404 After sales service for Pioneer Please contact the dealer or distributor from which you purchased the product for after sales service including warranty conditions or any other information In case the necessary infor mation is not available please contact the com Please do not ship your product to the compa nies at the addresses listed below for repair with out making advance contact For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada Inc CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway arkham Ontario L3R OP2 1 877 283 5901 Visit Our Website Visit us at the following site hitp www pioneerelectronics com In Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca 1 Register your product We will keep the details such as loss or theft of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim 2 Receive updates on the latest products and echnologies 3 Download owner s manuals order product cat more alog
157. e 5 Traffic Flow List Flow List Flows Traffic Flow Cal Dial Ring Dial Out Place A Call Make A Call Call Registered Point Call Address Book Call Registered Call Phone Number Call By Number Call Number Call By Phone Number Call Using Phone Num ber 174 Preferential voice command Other voice command Telephone Book Tel Book Phone Book Z Redial Call Again Phone Again lt Call Favorite 1 Call 1 Phone 1 gt Call Favorite 2 Call 2 Phone 2 S Call Favorite 3 Call 3 Phone 3 Call Favorite 4 Call 4 Phone 4 Call Favorite 5 Call 5 Phone 5 Received Call Received Who Called Call Home Phone Home Dial Home Other Operation Other Others Erase Tracks Delete Tracks Remove Tracks Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI Display POIs Set As Destination Set Go Route To Destination Begin Guidance Start Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint Waypoint Set As Destination Set Go Route To Destination Begin Guidance Start Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint Waypoint Yes Ok Agree No Not Ok Disagree Other voice commands for AV operation Preferential voice command Other voice command 210A Y IM Wa SAg UOI EHIAeN ANO Huljesado Lh TE Teh 21 be Navigation Screen Navigation Navi AV Screen AV Audio Change Source Next Source Source Change CD Change To CD Switch To C
158. e edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation 5 Touch Yes The changed character string is fixed and the system returns to the previous screen Changing the pronunciation of a playl ist name or track name You can change the pronunciation of a playlist or rack name The pronunciation is used as a com mand for voice recognition O Only pronunciation can be edited for the Artist playlist O The navigation system recognizes only the voice recognition characters registered in the current language If you change the interface language the voice recognition character reg istered before you change the language will not be recognized 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode D Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 125 Areaqry o1snq e2unog Ay ey Buisn FAM ESOL fe ges 2 Touch i gt lt q Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Library 3 Enter a new character string and then touch OK The system pronounces the character once and the pronunciation confirmation message appears Touch Yes to fix the change No Returns to the detailed information screen Repeat You can listen to the pronunciation again O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation 4 Touch Yes The changed character is fixed and the sys tem returns to the previous s
159. e Atlas and you rega her POI data and complete Agreement ding its subject his Agreement shall create a ship or principal agent rela e Atlas and you The internal all govern this Agreement he jurisdiction of the North nia or the State of California for the County of Santa Clara Sections 2 4 and 7 11 shall survive the expiration or ermination of this Agreement This Agreement may be amend ed altered o modified only by Tele Atlas You may not assign any part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas prior written consent You acknowledge and understand that the Data may be subject to restrictions on exportation and agree to comply with any applicable export laws In the event that any provision or part of a provi sion of this Agreement is determined to be invalid illegal or unenforceable such provision or part thereof shall be stricken from this Agree ment and the remainder of this Agreement shall be valid legal and enforceable to the maximum extent possible Any notice under this Agreement shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North America Inc Attention Contracts Department 11 Lafayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 USA The covenants and obligations undertaken by you herein are intended for the direct benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by Tele Atlas directly against you About the Data for the Map Database e This database was developed and recorded up o April 200
160. e Set a destination and waypoint s outside the CTR if you know where e restricted area is Try a destination or waypoint s away from the currently set points o some extent e Drive your vehicle to an unre stricted area and reset the destina ion and waypoint s Route calculation not possible because navigation cannot be pro vided around destination or starting point The destination waypoint s or start ing point are in an area where no road exists e g a mountain and the route calculation is impossible Set a destination and waypoint s on roads Reset the destination after you drive the vehicle to any road Route to destination cannot be cal culated The destination or waypoint s are in an isolated island etc without a ferry and the route calculation is impossi ble If there is no road connected to your starting point or destination this message will appear Change the destination 193 AW IAWN gt 5 5 Ss 2 X NAVI AV q Appendix Message e Ferry could not be avoided e Toll roads could not be avoided e Freeway could not be avoided e Ferry toll roads and freeways could not be avoided e Ferry and toll roads could not be avoided e Toll roads and freeways could not be avoided e Ferry and freeway could not be avoided The address does not exist Do you want to continue When These messages appear when a ferry route toll r
161. e position of that playlist is fixed 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the playback order of other playlists 7 Touch ESC The new order is fixed and the system returns to the normal playback screen Sorting the tracks in My Mix My Favorite playlist The playback order of tracks in the My Mix playlist and My Favorite playlist can be changed 1 Enter the track edit mode gt Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Sort Tracklists 3 Touch the track that you want to change 4 Touch R M F or to determine the destination 5 Touch the selected track again The destination is fixed 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the playback order of other tracks T Touch ESC The new order is fixed and the system returns o the normal playback screen Deleting a playlist You can delete a playlist in Albums group You cannot delete playlists in other groups O Ifyou delete a playlist in Albums group all racks in the playlist are deleted from the hard disk drive They are deleted from My Favor ites group at the same time O Ifyou delete the playlist the system does not delete the edited title information such as album title artist name or track name 1 Enter the playlist edit mode D Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 2 Touch Delete This Playlists 3 Touch Yes The playlist is deleted Deleting a track from the pla
162. e your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route see page 20 for details 1 Touch Wide Mode in the System Set tings menu The Wide Mode screen appears On the Wide Mode screen you can select the following items Full Just Cinema Zoom or Normal Normal normal A 4 3 picture is displayed normally giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture Full full A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only enabling you to enjoy a 4 3 TV picture normal picture without any omis sions Just just The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally toward the ends of the picture enabling you to enjoy a 4 3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen 155 gt lt 1ensiA olpny y im payejas Bulyjag olpny ay Bulziwoysng O ey ES xo gt oO o wil Chapter 16 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Cinema cinema A picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction ideal or acinema sized picture wide screen pic ure where captions lie outside the frame Zoom zoom A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the same propor
163. ect a category and touch OK The POI in the selected category and detailed category is searched Touch the name of the facility to set the route you want imi BH asmi BE OS mis E ismi H amii H 10 ni E Eg LUCKY MOTORS E MANDO motors d MEVALLARTE MOTORS Fbla scout AUT e ZP SIERRA CARS 8 MORE AUTOS LOS MEKIC gt v v When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When the route is already set Location con firmation screen is shown gt Checking the location on the map gt Page 31 79 O s w xo e e gt uoiewo u 194 0 pue 13uNn L WX Busy EE Registering user information Edit TOW Service Phone Register a towing company s phone number Touch Default to restore the default TOW service phone number 2 Enter the information written on the vehicle Z inspection certificate or insurance certificate 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Emergency Info Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Displa 2 Touch Setup y You can change the contents of the meters on the left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Dis play Set Emergency Information Until the sensor s initial learning is complete only the voltage and clock are available 3 Touch the desired item to register your information Edit VIN AAA BBB CCC Edit Policy Number AAA BBB COC O The speed di
164. een IAWN D Details of the map screen gt Page 39 eee ee ee E W WOODBURY RO w i 3 E E i E NEROSARTERAN 3 2 3 1 1 Current location 2 Distance to the destination 3 Estimated time of arrival default 4 ON OFF key for voice guidance Canceling the Route Guidance If you no longer need to travel to your destination or if you want to change your destination follow the steps below to cancel the route guidance 2 gt w xo N 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Cancel Route A message confirming whether to cancel the current route appears uol e1ad9 oIseg 2 Touch Yes The current route is deleted and a map of your surroundings reappears On this screen you can also select the follow ing items Skip Skip the route to the selected waypoint and ecalculate the route The skipped waypoint will not be deleted No Returns to the previous display without delet ing the route 33 EE Modifying the Route Calculation NAVI N v Q ar k oO Basic Operation Conditions You can modify the conditions for route calcula tion and recalculate the current route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview O Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Options Waypoints E Oh
165. een appears 2 Input a telephone number When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When the route is already set Location con firmation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 3 If there is more than one place for the number input a list of those places is dis played Touch the item you want in the list Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to Your Favorite Location lf your home location is registered the route home can be calculated by touching a single key from the navigation menu Also you can register one location such as your workplace as your favorite location and the route is calculated in a similar way D Registering Your Home and Your Favorite Location gt Page 61 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Return Home or Go to When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 When the route is already set Location con firmation screen is shown D Checking the location on the map gt Page 3 57 IAWN i uoneunsaq sno 0 jnoy e Bunos EEICT mE Selecting Destination from the NAVI Chapter 5 lt p a o a 5 gt o 2 v 2 E 4 d lt o 72 Destination History and Address
166. egistering and Editing Locations A CAUTION e For safety reasons these functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route see page 20 for details Registering Locations Overview Registering places you visit frequently saves time and effort Also routes to registered locations can be calculated easily by touching the corre sponding touch key This registered location information can also be modified The registered location appears on the map as an icon The registered locations are categorized into the following three types Gi Home location Register your home location here Once your home location is registered the route to your home can be set by simply touching Return Home in the Destination menu Only one location can be registered ke Favorite location Register a point that you frequently visit for example your office here Once your favorite ocation is registered a route to your favorite ocation can be set by simply touching Go to in the Destination menu Only one location can be registered amp default Address Book entry Register other points you often visit here Once locations are registered you can set the route by selecting an item from Address Book O The items in Address Book are automatically updated in alphabetic order However Home location
167. ek Indian Italian Jap CE CREAM amp DAIRY RY DAIRY T BURGER JACK IN THE S SECOND CUP SONIC ICBY TIM HORTON S TJ ie rt o Q e lt 3 3 7 GRILL CARRABBA S ITALIA DOMINO S PIZZA FAZOLI S T KELSEY S LITTLE CAESARS S PIZZA PASTA R ROU E RED LOBSTE D RIDAY S THE KEG AC H E B HY VEE RA KET T VON S WHOLE FOODS WIN E ALBERTSONS ALDI ATLANTI IGA JEWEL OSCO ROGER LPH S SAFEWAY SAVE A LOT SHAW S SU C amp PAC FIC TEA CO B E P LO CUB FOODS FOOD LION G JER PANTRY PATHMARK PIGGLY WIGGLY ANT GIANT EAGLE PUBLIX RALEY S ERMARKET STOP amp SHOP STOP N GO TOPS DIXIE Supermarkets Others FRIENDLY MAR Category name Automotive AAA RV TRUCK FACILITY Automobi Category name Retailer Chains e Club Parking Car Pa s amp Accessories Car Repair Faci ity Car Wash BURLINGTO AXX TARGET O ERI HOST ECON NN HOM m T Z C 4 APore CoO DIO 6 S gory n UP QL Cc FINITI ISU VOLVO Car Ren Retailer Others 176 ategory name Hotel TINN BAYMO O LODGE EMBAS ALITY COMFORT CLAR ame Car Deale RA AUDI BMW BUICK CADILLAC CH ZU JAGUAR JEEP KIA SSAN OLDSMOBILE PONTIAC PORSCH Dealer Others Category name Rental and Other Services al Car Video Rental
168. el directly by enter number Enter the channel number touch Enter and hen touch Back g To cancel the input numbers touch Clear O This function in not available with GEX P900XM 10 Switching the touch keys to previous page 11 Switching the channel category Touch Up or Down to select the desired cate gory 12 Switching the XM information Each touch of DISP changes the display on the bottom of the detail information as follows GEX P900XM Channel name Artist name feature Song program title Information Channel number GEX P910XM Channel name Artist name feature Song program title Channel category O This function is not available with GEX P10XMT and GEX P920XM Display the Radio ID If you select CH 000 the Radio ID is displayed 1 Touch 10Key Direct 2 Input 000 and then touch Enter If you select another channel display of the Radio ID is canceled O You can also display the Radio ID to select RADIO ID from channel category in the Category Mode Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title O The channel list shows all channels during he All Ch Mode and the channels included in the selected category during the Category Mode To switch the channel mode touch Mode
169. er lowercase letters Touch Caps to enter uppercase letters Touch to toggle the selection 3 Ifthe pronunciation is suitable touch Yes The details you set are registered and the Address Book menu appears Alternative options No Completes the registration without editing the pronunciation Repeat You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the name you entered No sounds can be output during jg g If the pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation When you confi is shown on the name displayed m the pronunciation left side of the location in Address Book menu This icon indica es that this name can be used as a voice command during voice operation You cannot change the name of your home Changing a pronunciation 1 Touch Pronunciation 2 Enter anew pronunciation then touch OK The current pronunciation appears in the text box if already set Delete the current pronun ciation and enter a new pronunciation between 1 and 23 characters long 3 Ifthe pronunciation is suitable touch Yes The details you set are registered and the Address Book menu appears Alternative options No Cancels the editing Repeat You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the name you entered No sounds can be output during eg g Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit
170. erminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement agree to destroy Upon such termination you he Software 6 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States govern ment the Data is licensed with Limited Rights Utilization of the Software is subject to the restrictions specified in the Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or the equivalent clause for non defense agencies Pio neer Electronics USA Inc 2265 East 220th Street Long Beach CA 90810 7 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agree ent This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of he State of California If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable he remaining provisions of this Agreement shall emain in full force and effect PIONEER AVIC Z2 for Canada THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS THE END USER AND PIONEER ELECTRON CS OF CANADA INC PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE
171. es the map to Scroll mode and the map begins scrolling in the direction you touched The scrolling stops when you release your finger from the screen Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map of your surroundings O Touch the area close to the center of the screen to scroll slowly touch near the sides of the screen to scroll quickly j Us JE AA 4 S mr 6 Ss pM GES XxX ZS y f a J o TEE 4 1 Scroll cursor The position of scroll cursor shows the location selected on the current map O When the scale is 0 25 mile 200 m or lower the road appears light blue in the vicinity of the scroll cursor 2 Direction line This is the line connecting between the current location and the scroll cursor The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi cated with a straight line 3 Distance from the current location This shows the distance in a straight line between the location indicated by the scroll cur sor and your current location 4 Street name city name area name and other information for this location The information displayed varies according to the scale Touching 34 on the right displays hidden text 5 Current location key Touching aA returns you to the map of your cur rent location Viewing the information of a specified location An icon appears at registered places home loca tion specific places address book entries and places where there is
172. ess the V button to display Picture ach time you touch or increases or 8 Adjust screen decreases the level of the desired item 8 3 Touch ESC to return to the previous 3 T screen s2 o gt a2 Switching the backlight on or off E By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen E z you can turn off the screen display without turn E Brightness Adjusts the black intensity ing off the voice guidance T e Contrast Adjusts the contrast Color Adjusts the color saturation 1 Press and hold the V button 2 e Hue Adjusts the tone of color red is The backlight turns off and the screen turns emphasized or green is emphasized off Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of dis O Press the V button once again to turn on 6 play the backlight and the screen is displayed Back Camera Shows the picture adjustment display for the rear view camera 160 Language Code Chart for DVD sie aa en tebe rg aK se gt lt ETEC EEC O E Language code input code Language code input code Japanese ja 1001 English en 0514 French fr 0618 Spanish es 0519 German de 0405 Italian it 0920 Chinese zh 2608 Dutch nl 1412 Portuguese pt 1620 Swedish sv 1922 Russian ru 1821 Korean ko 1115 Greek el 0512 Afar aa 0101 Abkhazian ab 0102 Afrikaans af 0106 Amharic am 0113 Arabic ar 0118 Assamese as 0119 Aymara ay 0125 Azerbaij
173. etail Information for Playable Media for more cautions about handling each type of media 106 Screen configuration Mo 2 rec 02 Eye to eye ret i03 Integration 04 PREMIER rec 05 Brilliance AY Settings 8 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the disc currently playing when available 3 Playback method indicator Shows which playback method has been selected 4 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track currently playing 5 Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing when available 6 Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist currently playing when available 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track 8 Track list Shows tracks of the CD currently playing Title display usic recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com O Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Data base on the built in hard disk drive you insert a CD TEXT disc the system prior itizes the title information encoded in CD TEXT disc Some discs have
174. ey operation 143 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 144 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 144 Chapter 15 Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX Operating the AV Input Source AV 145 Selecting AV INPUT as the source 145 Operating the External Unit EXT 145 Selecting EXT 1 or EXT 2 as the source 145 Screen configuration 145 Touch key operation 145 Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6 key 146 Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function 4 146 Switching the automatic and manual function 147 Operating the AUX Input Source AUX 147 Selecting AUX as the source 147 15 Chapter 16 Customizing the Audio Setting re lated with Audio Visual AV Setting Overview 149 ow to Operate the Audio Settings screen 149 Customizing the Audio Settings Items 149 g the equalizer 149 ng the simulated sound stage 151 g balance adjustment 151 ng subwoofer output 152 g s g s Q n ti NC Q ee non fading output 152 ting loudness 152 he high pass filter 152 ting source levels 153 izing the System Settings Items 153 ow to view and operate the System Settings 153 Setting up the built in DVD drive 154 Changing the wide screen mode 155 Setting for rear view camera 156 Setting the video input 156 Switching the auxiliary setting 157 Switching the muting attenuation timing 157 Switching the muting attenuation
175. f a camera which outputs mirror reversed images otherwise screen image may appear reversed O Immediately confirm whether the display changes to a rear view camera image when the shift lever is moved to REVERSE R from another position Q When the screen changes to full screen rear view camera image during normal driving switch to the opposite setting in Polarity Q Initially this function is set to Off Touch Camera Input in the System Set tings menu N Touch On to turn rear view camera set ting on Unless this setting is On you cannot switch to Rear View mode oo Touch Polarity to select an appropriate setting for polarity Each time you touch Polarity switches between the following polarity Battery When the polarity of the con nected lead is positive while the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position e GND When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position Setting the video input You can switch the setting according to the con nected component O Select Video to watch video of a connected component as AV INPUT source 1 Touch AV Input in the System Settings menu Each touch of AV Input changes the set tings as follows e Off No video component is connected e Video External video component e EXT Pioneer external unit connected with an RCA video cable O When
176. f beeps and navigation guidance cannot be adjusted Adjusting the volume of navigation guidance and beeps is not possible The vehicle s light is turned ON and Automatic is selected on Day Night Display The vehicle cabin temperature is extremely low Read about the Day Night Dis play setting gt Page 51 and if desired select Day A Liquid Crystal Display LCD is used and such displays tend to darken when cold Wait for the vehi cle to warm up gt 5 5 Ss 2 X Picture quality adjustment of the dis play is not correct Display tilt is not at the proper set ing The volume level is low Refer to Operating the picture adjustment Page 160 to adjust he picture quality Press and hold the EJECT button to adjust the tilt Adjust the volume level The attenuator or mute is on Turn the attenuator or mute off The speaker lead is disconnected You cannot adjust these parameters with the VOL A F button You cannot adjust them with the VOL 4 F button Check the connection Turn the volume up or down with Volume in the Settings menu Turn the volume up or down accord ing to Volume gt Page 95 in the Settings menu A strange sound is heard when the vehicle comes close to a certain place E g Dog barking The sound for the entry of Address Book is set Set the sound setting of that entry to No Sound gt Page 66 An al
177. following types of traffic congestion cannot be deselected and are always dis played and taken into consideration stop and go stopped traffic and closed blocked roads 5 Touch OK Qa gt Y xo uoewozug opea Buse 73 i IAWN PCCM voneuoju oyei Buisn 74 Chapter 8 am z 5 gt Using XM Tuner and Other Information S Using the XM Tuner to View 0 9 Punc Oper Sym Stock Sports and Other Infor You can switch the upper line to input the mation number and marks Touch to toggle the selection When an XM tuner GEX P10XMT is connected O The method for inputting the text is almost you can receive stock prices sports and other same as for inputting street names information and display it onscreen You may D Text input method Page 29 also register favorite information on the naviga g Ifthe input ticker symbol does not match tion system in full the actual ticker symbol for the stock you may not be able to find it Displaying stock prices playing P Deleting stocks to be displayed Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks onscreen Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks If 12 stocks are already registered delete as many entries as necessary to add new stocks 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Stock Info 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Stock Info 2 Touch Delete 3 Touch the ticker
178. formation in Traffic Settings the information can be displayed in a list or on a ation is always on related with these D Selecting traffic information to display gt Page 72 Chapter 7 uum IAWN Viewing traffic list Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a list This allows you to check how many traffic inci dents have occurred their location and their dis ance from your current position Checking traffic information Traffic information except traffic flow information is displayed onscreen in a list 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Traffic Events The list with received traffic information is shown 2 Touch M or R to view the incident list Places street names where incidents have occurred are displayed in the list 1 2 W 5 AMINO DEL NORTE Direction WORTH Road construction tavig lhe nig BES mi Qa e E3 xo e p N fa TIS CAMINO DEL NORTE Direction SOUTH va Road construction during the nig BS mi 1 Street or place 2 Direction 3 Incident 4 Distance to the location 5 The incident numbers currently dis played and the total number of incidents O The incidents that have already been read will be displayed in white Unread inci dents will be in yellow 6 Sort key You can sort betical order You can sort the traffic information by dis tance from your curren
179. g Saved is displayed O The song title and artist name of up to 10 racks can be memorized If you try to save more than 10 tracks FULL is displayed O You cannot memorize a song that does not have song title and artist name informa ion O There is a possibility the memorized title is not displayed correctly When the memorized song is broadcast Alert message is displayed Touch Jump to switch to that station and you can listen to that track If you touch Stay the cannel does not switch O Ifthe alert for the song is OFF or Alert Off is selected no notification will be provided even when that song is broadcast gt Setting the alert for each memorized song Page 137 gt Switching the alert setting Page 137 O If there is a slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the track being broadcast no notification will be provided though they are the same song O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navigation system Setting the alert for each memorized song You can change the setting of the alert when the track is broadcast again You can enable or dis able alert for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit My Mix setting screen will be displayed 2 Touch Previous and Next to select the song title that you want to exclude from the alert target 3 Touch On Off Each touch of On Off turns the alert setting for the song
180. g the imitation of the installation angle Confirm the installation angle The navigation system must be installed within the allowed installation angle For details refer to Installation Man ual No data available at this time o data is available that can be used with the XM tuner Wait for a while and try the operation again UPDATING Updating The selected channel is not included in your subscription Select another channel Radio is being updated with the lat Wait until the encryption code is fully est encryption code updated Route calculation was not possible Route calculation has failed because Change the destination of a malfunction in map data soft e Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if Route calculation not possible because destination is too far ware or hardware The destination is too far this message persists e Set a destination closer to the start ing point e Set one or more waypoints Route calculation not possible because destination is too close The destination or waypoint s are too close Set a destination and waypoint s far ther from the starting point Route calculation not possible due to traffic regulations e The destination or waypoint s are in a Control Traffic Zone CTR and the route calculation is hampered Your vehicle is currently in a Con trol Traffic Zone CTR and the route calculation is hampered
181. h 3 e To select 10 touch 1 and 0 in order e To select 23 touch 2 and 3 in order For time time search e To select 21 minutes 03 seconds touch 2 1 Min and 3 Sec in order e To select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 1 Min in order To cancel the input numbers touch Clear 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter This starts playback from the selected scene With discs featuring a menu you can also touch Menu or Top Menu and then make selections from the displayed menu Entering the numerical com mands You can use this function when you need to enter a numerical command during DVD playback 1 Touch 10Key Search and then touch 10key Mode 10key mode 2 Touch 0 9 to input the desired number 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter Operating the Radio FM You can listen to the radio by using the navigation system This section describes operations for Radio FM Selecting FM as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch FM gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration o 3 4 7 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator E ma 6 Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to FM3 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected 4 F
182. has telephone number data touch Note 1 International call with using is not available in the voice operation Voice commands related to AV operation The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation screen Common AV commands AV Operation gt Change Display gt Navigation Screen gt Switching to the navigation map or menu screen AV Operation Change Display AV screen Switching to the Audio source screen AV Operation Source Off gt Turning the Audio source off AV Operation gt Traffic Channel gt Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner AV Operation gt Change Source gt CD DVD AM FM TV MCD AV Input AUX Sirius iPod XM EXTERNAL1 EXTERNAL2 Music Library gt Switching to the desired audio source You cannot switch to an unavailable source Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source Operation for Multi CD AV Operation gt Disc 1 to Disc 12 gt Selecting the disc Operation for FM AV Operation Preset 1 to Preset 6 gt Switching to tha AV Operation gt Change Band gt Switching the band Operation for AM AV Operation Preset 1 to Preset 6 gt Switching to tha or playback preset station directly preset station directly 70 Operation for TV AV Operation Preset 1 to Preset 12 gt Switching to that preset station dire
183. hat are subject to traffic regulations during a certain time when the setting Time restrictions is On 2 Distance to the destination 3 Travel time to destination 4 Set the displayed route Sets the displayed route as your route and starts the route guidance gt When the route guidance starts gt Page 33 5 Display multiple routes You can select a desired route from multiple route options Calculated routes are shown in dif ferent colors ea w lt g Sa x k f oz ES Zim P 3m G Oki OK Touching to switch to another oute Touching OK returns to the previous dis play f you set waypoints you cannot use the multiple oute option O There can be cases that the same route is dis played even when multiple routes are searched g In multiple route calculations both routes that use and avoid the freeways are calculated independently of the setting for Avoid Free way 6 Change the route calculation condition Modify each calculation condition and recalcu late the route gt Refer to the steps after Step 3 of the Route Calculation Conditions odifying Page 34 7 View the route profile You can check the streets that you will travel to reach the destination D Refer to the steps after Step 3 of Checking the passing streets with a list Page 35 8 Check the shape of route You can check the overall shape of your route and the location of destination on
184. hat you cannot hear outside t emergency vehicles O To promote safety certain functions are dis nless the vehicle is stopped and or brake is applied on system is the intellectual prope af rovider and the provider is responsi for such content AW IAWN w fo S S c n gt amp gt a lt a 4 3 NAVI AV i Before Using the System 20 eep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety information Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions carefully Do not install this naviga may i obstruct the drive he performance of any o ing systems or safety features including air bags or hazard lamp buttons or iii impair the driver s ability to safely operate the vehicle ion system where it s vision ii impair Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be con siderably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled Never use headphones while driving the vehicle s operat Additional Safety Information To ensure safe driving Parking brake interlock Certain functions such as viewing of DVD video and certain touch key operations offered by this navigation system could be dangerous and or unlawful if used while driving To prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in mot
185. he current track Folder Repeat Repeat the folder currently playing O If you select another track or perform fast for ward rewind during Track Repeat the epeat play is canceled O If you select another folder or perform fast for ward rewind during Folder Repeat the epeat play is canceled You can perform ack search within that folder with Folder epeat O When Folder Repeat is selected it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that older 9 Play tracks in random order Touching geal switches between playing tracks andomly or sequentially within a selected repeat ange 10 Scan folders and tracks Touching turns the scan play on or off Scan play will be performed for the selected epeat range O In default the beginning of the first track of each folder will be played for about 10 sec onds When Folder Repeat is selected for epeat play the beginning of each track in the selected folder will play for about 10 seconds When you find the desired track touch o turn scan play off O After track or folder scanning is finished nor al playback of the tracks will begin again Notes on playing MP3 disc O When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and MIXED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD DA When playing back the CD DA part the opera tion is the same as for normal music CDs Likewise when play
186. he data for that city area is not contained a freeway 41 Aejdsiq de ey peoy o moH Ry pT Kel 1 be EE Display items gt q z Chapter 3 How to Read the Map Display g Information with the mark appears only when the route is set O Depending on the conditions and settings some items may not be displayed A Current location The current location of your vehicle The tip of the triangular mark indicates your heading and the display moves automatically as you drive O The head of the triangular mark is the current vehicle position K Destination The checker flag indicates your destination Guidance point The next guidance point next turning point etc is shown by a yellow flag Up to the next three guidance points are shown Al waypoint The checkered flag and number 1 to 5 indicates your waypoint 1 Name of the street to be used or next guidance point 2 Distance to the guidance point Touching allows you to hear the infor mation again 3 Distance to the destination or distance to waypoint The distance on this button shows the distance to the destination or to each waypoint If waypoints are set the distance to the destination and the next waypoint change with each touch O When the vehicle position is on the route the distance to the destination or waypoint appears When the vehicle position is not on the route the linear distance to the destina
187. he data in the dialed number history or the received call history You can edit them and the edited entries are registered in the phone book You can also delete the history data Editing data 1 Touch Information in the Navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received Calls 3 Touch gM The edit screen appears Steps after this are he same as for editing the phone book gt Editing the entry in Phone Book gt Page 90 O The phone number cannot be edited if it is already registered in the phone book Deleting data 1 Touch Information in the Navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received Calls 3 Touch Delete 4 Touch Yes All history data is deleted and the current location screen appears O To cancel the deletion touch No 92 Notes for hands free phoning General notes e Connection to all cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaran teed The line of sight distance between this naviga tion system and your cellular phone must be 10 meters or less when sending and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth technology How ever the transmission distance may become shorter than the estimated distance depend ing on the environment in use e You cannot delete a registered cellular phone f you need to delete it refer to Returning the avigation System to the Default or Factory Settings
188. he operation for navi gation control NAVI AV indicates that the description is related to both operation for navigation control and AV control AV IAWN i About the definition of terminology Front Display and Rear Display In this manual the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the Front Display Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi gation unit will be referred to as the Rear Display Video image Video image in this manual indicates the moving image from DVD Video in the built in DVD drive or from the equipment that is connected to this system with an AV BUS or RCA cable such as a TV tuner or general purpose AV equipment Color difference of the map display between day and night VICTORY BLVD M Pilm im ee ME Ohtsa A EAL watse ave aueue n AMESA Night display The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display When driving at night the colors you see may differ from those shown License Agreement PIONEER AVIC Z2 for U S A THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS THE END USER AND PIONEER ELECTRON ICS USA INC PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIO NEER PRODUCTS YOU AGREE
189. hich source has been selected 2 SIRIUS band indicator Shows the SIRIUS band which has been selected 133 wi SNIUIS NX 221Nn0S Ay 24 Buisn EAN 1 dey EE 3 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator gt lt Chapter 13 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all chan nels in All Ch Mode and select a channel from selected category in Category Mode D Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode gt Page 134 4 SIRIUS channel number indicator Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the tuner is tuned to 5 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcas channel currently being received O The message ON THE AIR disappears if the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason D Troubleshooting Page 188 Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch SIRIUS to select the SIRIUS When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys Page 1 All Ch Mode 134 Page 1 Category Mode Items marked with an asterisk cannot be used on SIR PNR1 1 Touch Recalling channels from the pre set Touch to recall the preset channel g In All Ch Mode you can recall the preset channel by pre
190. hnology on Cancel the pairing connection and retry Operate the target phone and accept he connection request from the nav igation system Furthermore check he connection settings on your cel ular phone Check whether your cellular phone is urned off and whether the distance o your cellular phone is too far AW IAYN Registration step has been success ul but connection has failed for some reason The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire ess technology is turned off during he registration step Retry the registration and if a con nection still cannot be established ry connecting using your cellular phone eep turning the target phone s Bluetooth wireless technology on during the registration Rejection by the cellular phone has received Operate the target phone and accept he registration request from the nav igation system Furthermore check he connection settings on your cel ular phone Registration step has failed for some reason Retry the registration and if the regis ration still fails try registering using your cellular phone Automatic connection in progress Please try again later Automatic connection in progress Please try manually later f you try to perform another opera ion during automatic connection by he system f you try to connect another phone during automatic connection by the system e Wait for a while and retry e Establish that connec
191. hoices are selected touching the display MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 It is an audio com pression standard set by a working group MPEG of the ISO International Standards Organization MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1 10th the level of a conventional disc MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group and is an international Video image compression standard Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and recorded using this system Multi angle With regular TV programs although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles letting you choose your viewing angle as desired Multi audio Multilingual dialog Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple lan guages Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc letting you choose as desired Multi session Multi session is a recording method that allows addi tional data to be recorded later When recording data on a CD ROM CD R or CD RW etc all data from begin ning to end is treated as a single unit or session Multi session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions in one disc AW IAWN i Multi subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin gle DVD letting you choose as desired Optical digital output By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal
192. ibrary Recording 117 Recording all tracks in a CD 118 Recording a CD manually 118 Recording only the first track ofa CD 118 Stopping CD recording 118 Notes on CD recording 119 Music Library Play 119 Selecting LIBRARY as the source 119 Screen configuration 119 Touch key operation 120 Creating a playlist with a customized order 122 Editing a playlist or tracks 123 Assigning another candidate for title information 128 Chapter 13 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Operating the XM Satellite Radio 129 Selecting XM as the source 129 Screen configuration 129 Touch key operation 130 Display the Radio ID 131 Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display 131 Using My Mix function 132 Using the direct traffic announcement function 133 Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 133 Selecting SIRIUS as the source 133 Touch key operation 134 Selecting teams for Game Alert 135 Displaying game information Game Info 136 Using My Mix function 136 Using the Traffic amp Weather preset function 137 Chapter 14 Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV Operating the Multi CD Player 139 Selecting M CD as the source 139 Screen configuration 139 Touch key operation 139 Operating the iPod 141 Selecting iPod as the source 141 Screen configuration 141 Touch key operation 141 Browsing for a song 142 Operating the TV tuner 143 Selecting TV as the source 143 Screen configuration 143 Touch k
193. igation system you can use shortcuts related to phone functions g Items marked with an asterisk cannot be removed from the shortcut menu 1 When the map is Spier touch i Parts a Pas Cai 2 N E menu EJ Route Options Displayed when the map is not scrolled This item can be selected only during route guid ance You can modify the conditions for route calcu lation and recalculate the current route D Modifying the Route Calculation Condi tions gt Page 34 EJ Destination Displayed when the map is scrolled Set the route to the place specified with the scroll cur sor EA Registration Register information on the location indicated by the scroll cursor to the Address Book gt Registering a Location into Address Book Page 62 B Vicinity Search Find POls Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor D Finding a POI in the Vicinity gt Page 55 45 IAWN i Aejdsiq de ey peoy o moH Hy TE Keb 1t be m Pael Overlay POI z Displays icons for surrounding facilities POI on the map D Displaying POI on the Map gt Page 50 KN Volume Displays Volume Setting D Volume gt Page 95 Phone Book Displays Phone Book D Calling a number in the Phone Book gt Page 87 D Editing the entry in Phone Book gt Page 90 Menu Close Hides the shortcut menu or D Qa oO gt s Q 2 a
194. ile driving the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohib ited will appear on the screen Selecting TV as the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch TV D For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 Screen configuration M D 3 4 PE Ay settings Frio 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to TV 1 or TV 2 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned to 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV tuner When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys 4 3 1 Select channels from the list The list lets you see the list of channels and select one of them to view O Touching H or M switches to the next or previ ous page in the list O You can register your favorite channels in the list gt Storing and recalling broadcast stations gt Page 144 2 Touch Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning The tuner will scan the channels until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is found O Ifyou
195. important emergency information pertaining to your vehi cle insurance and current location Such emer gency information could be useful in the event of an accident or vehicle breakdown The accuracy of the personal information is dependent on the accuracy of the information entered into the navi gation system by the user A WARNING e The Emergency Info screen is only intended to provide information to a driver that may be useful during an emergency situation and does not replace the need to call for emergency assistance when nec essary Checking the information regis tered as Emergency Info 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Emergency Info 1 2 CANO W PASADENA Wwy Wion 118 412 Nlat 34 4544 4 65 The information registered as Emergency Info appears on the screen 1 You are currently at Your current position is indicated by the street name latitude and longitude 171 z IAW O s Y xo p gt uoiewo u 194 0 pue 13uNn L WX Busy mmm 2 Personal Information NAVI Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other Information Your VIN number insurance policy number and he telephone number of your insurance com pany can be displayed once entered by the user 3 Emergency TOW service phone The phone number of the subscribing Emergency TOW service can be displayed once entered by
196. in that Folder inserted disc ures on page 101 Data Read error Failed to read the data because the Try re reading the data by inserting a CD R is damaged or dirty Or the clean CD R pick up lens of the DVD drive is dirty Clean the pick up lens with a com mercially available cleaning kit for DVD then try to reading again The Pictures folder exists on the CD R but no data in JPEG format exists Use the appropriate data after read ing Limitations for importing pic tures on page 101 JPEG file is corrupt The data is damaged or an attempt Use the appropriate data after read was made to set a JPEG image that ing Limitations for importing pic was not made to specifications as tures on page 101 the background picture CAUTION Parking brake lead is incorrectly con Confirm once more that their con System detected improper connec tion o Please check your configuration for Please see Operation Manual for more information regarding safe safety opera Parking Brake lead on nected nections are correct 194 Message Connection failed Registration failed When The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire less technology is turned off The cellular phone is paired con nected with another device Rejection has been received from the cellular phone The target cellular phone can not be ound What to do Turn the target phone s Bluetooth wireless tec
197. incoming call Press to hang up the phone during talking on the phone n voice operation return to the previous screen AY button Same function as P LIST A V button lt gt button Same function as TRK lt gt button button Same function as VOL 4 button BAND button Same function as Band touch key SOURCE button Same function as AV button Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio Set EEEE tings menu z Normal screen e g CD c 01 Drive it Touch 02 Eye to eye Mi 03 Integration B a 2 Hide 2 PIONEER TIME 00 08 D4 PREMIER ci 05 Brilliance AV Settings a 3 4 5 AV Settings System Settings Audio Settings 1 Information plate Displays the information e g track title about the source being played 2 Touch panel keys Touch to operate the source being played 3 Detailed information Displays the detailed information about the source being played 4 AV Settings key Displays the AV Settings menu 5 Hide key Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information If you touch the screen they are displayed again 6 Audio Settings tab Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings 7 System Settings tab Switches the setting items to those for System Settings 8 Setting Item
198. ing back the MP3 part the operation is the same as for MP3 Refer to the instructions for each type of media 109 gt lt olpey pue aang GA U 1Ng aa4n0g AY 34 Buisn WAA T Koh 11 be wil Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio If you have switched between playback of MP3 files and audio data CD DA playback starts at the first track on the disc Playback is carried out in order of file number Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3 files For example if folder 01 ROOT con tains no MP3 files playback commences with folder 02 When playing back files recorded as VBR variable bit rate files the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used lf the built in DVD drive does not operate prop erly an error message may be displayed Built in DVD drive gt Page 196 110 Operating the DVD A CAUTION For safety reasons Video image cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view Video image you must stop ina safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route see page 20 for details You can play a DVD Video using the built in DVD drive of the navigation system This section describes operations for DVD Video Selecting DVD as the source 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert a disc you want to play to disc loading slot The source changes and then
199. ings When the screen is frozen Park your vehicle in a safe place and cut off the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on If this does not solve the problem press the RESET button on the navigation system Symptom CD or DVD playback is not possible Cause e disc is inserted upside down Action See Insert the disc with the label upward e disc is dirty Clean disc amaged Insert a normal round disc T 7 The disc is cracked or otherwise d T f cannot play e files on the CD are an irregular Check the file format ile format The CD format cannot be played Replace disc back The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is Also see Handling and Care of the Disc in the Hardware Manual and Detail nformation for Playable Media for more cautions about handling each ype of media No picture The parking brake lead is not con nected or applied Connect a parking brake lead cor rectly and apply the parking brake Parking brake interlock is activated Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake D Parking brake interlock gt Page 20 e AV Input setting is incorrect Please read the following page and set the setting correctly Page 156 The audio skips The navigation system is
200. inished changing Limitations for importing pictures When you burn a CD R RW make sure the total data size of the CD R RW is greater than 100MB by storing dummy data or other filler information Otherwise the disc may not be recognized by the built in DVD drive O You cannot use a CD R RW containing MP3 files or Audio data CD DA part for importing pictures O When storing pictures on a CD R RW cre ate a folder named Pictures in the CD R RW and store the picture files in this folder Up to 200 picture files can be used in total including pictures that are already stored in the hard disk drive and pictures in the CD R RW O When you burn a CD R RW limit the num ber of folder hierarchy levels to eight You can only use a CD R RW finalized with single session for importing pictures You can only use a CD R RW finalized with Mode1 for importing pictures O Only JPEG format jpg or JPG pictures can be used Progressive format JPEG pic tures cannot be used 101 5 suoipuny uoljebiaey 104 shulyjag jesauay ayy BuiAyipow OL eT Keb 1 be gm Using only the standard Latin characters gt q z w Q iy oO Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions alphabets of both cases A Z a z and num bers 0 9 is recommended for the file name If you want to use letters with diacritical m
201. ion gt Address Book gt lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Location Screen A lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Location Screen A Destination gt Go To lt Registered location s pronunciation gt gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation Destination gt Waypoint lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Making phone call to entry on the address book Destination gt Call lt Registered location s pronunciation gt f the registered location has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the registered location playing the map of the entry on the address book Destination gt Display lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Display the map of surroundings on that facility Search the facilities in vicinity Destination gt Vicinity Search gt lt Category Name gt lt Sub Category Name gt gt Location Screen B Displaying the destination history Destination gt Destination History gt Display the Destination History screen Setting the route to your home Destination gt Return Home gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation 168 Making phone call to your home Destination gt Call Home gt Touch VOICE ic
202. ion cost expense or claim of any ind or character including but not limited to attorney s fees arising out of or in connection with any use or possession by you of the Data fa 7 U S Government Rights If you are an agency department or other entity of the United States Government or funded in whole or in part by the United States Govern ment then use duplication reproduction release modification disclosure or transfer of this commercial product and accompanying doc umentation is restricted in accordance with the 9 LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS 252 227 7014 a 1 JUN 1995 DOD com mercial computer software definition DFARS 227 1202 1 DOD policy on commercial computer software FAR 52 227 19 JUN 1987 commercial computer software clause for civilian agencies DFARS 252 227 7015 NOV 1995 DOD technical data commercial items clause FAR 52 227 14 Alternates Il and III JUN 1987 civilian agency technical data and noncommercial computer software clause and or FAR 12 211 and FAR 12 212 commercial item acquisitions as appli cable In case of conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions listed herein and this License the construction that provides greater limitations on the Government s rights shall con trol Contractor manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America Inc 11 Lafayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 1445 Phone 603 643 0330 The Data is
203. ion there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set and when the vehi cle is moving If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving they will become disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake WARNING e To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws the navigation system is not for use with a Video image that is visible to the driver In some countries or states the viewing of Video image on a display inside a vehi cle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal Where such regulations apply they must be obeyed When applying the parking brake in order to view Video image or to enable other functions offered by the navigation sys tem park your vehicle in a safe place and keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill or otherwise might move when releasing the parking brake A CAUTION e Accuracy performance of interlock may be impacted by such factors as GPS signal detection speed pulse wire connectivity and driving habits or conditions of the place where the vehicle is parked It is strongly suggested that the speed pulse wire be connected for accuracy of navigation and better performance of interlo
204. ion of incidental o he above limitation o you This warranty disclai APPLICABLE YOU AGREE T ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT THE AGGREGATE INCLUDING BREAC OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT ER TY DISCLAIMER THIS FOR ANY REASO UNENFORCEABLE OR AT PIONEER S CEED FIFTY PERCENT D BY YOU FOR THE the exclusion or limita consequential damages so exclusion mer and limitation of lia bility shall not be applicable to the extent that hey are prohibited by any applicable federal ay not apply to state or local law which provides that such a dis claimer or limi empted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES ation cannot be waived o pre You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical d ata received from Pio neer nor the direct product thereof will be exported outside Canada except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada If the Software h as been rightfully obtained by you outside of Canada you agree that you will not re expor other technical data rece the direct product thereo the laws and regulations and regulations of the ju obtained the Software 5 TERMINATION may terminate it at any ti the Software nor any ived from Pioneer nor except as permitted by of Canada and the laws isdiction in which you This Agreement is effective until terminated You me by dest
205. ired track touch to turn scan play off O After track or playlist scanning is finished normal playback of the tracks will begin again Indicator Implication Scan only The beginning of the first tracks of each playlist in the group is played for about 10 seconds Playlist The beginning of each track in the Repeat and selected playlist is played for SEn about 10 seconds Searching a track from the playlist Once tracks are recorded the navigation system categorizes them in a Group and several types of playlists are automatically created A playlist is a list that shows the playback order of tracks D Relationship of groups playlists and tracks Page 120 Searching for an album Select a playlist formed by an album and play it back 1 Touch Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Albums 1078 i D1 Sound vesion soul P Ol Drive it PIONEER TIME 02 33 Phineas 2 search at PE m Artists ita Prt P N ee m Gorros My Favorites ma w 7 i hA AY Setings i Hide 3 Touch the album name Album playlist you want to play back 1008 ee O11 sound vesion soul P 01 Drive it PIONEER TIME 02 46 AO Bound Vision Soul PO search Mias 0 DZ The worlds first Minos Comming gene aton 1 04 08 01 01 250 08 Actas aida The first track in the selected playlist is played back 121 gt lt Areaqry o1
206. is not on the map x g e Ifyou are on a steep mountain road with many 2 height changes e If you drive in zig zags e If you enter or exit a multi storey parking lot or similar using a spiral ramp e Ifthe road has connected hairpin bends 186 e If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi e Ifyou join the road after driving around a large am lar structure parking lot AW IAWN LPD If your vehicle s wheels spin such as on a e When you pass around a traffic circle gravel road or in snow _ s d e When starting driving immediately after start ing the engine e If you turn your navigation system on while driving e Ifyou put on chains or change your tires for ones with a different size Some types of vehicles may not output a speed signal while driving at just a few kilometers per hour In such a case the current location of your vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a traffic congestion or in a parking lot gt 5 5 3 2 X e If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig nals for a considerable period e Ifyou drive very slowly or in a start and stop manner as in a traffic congestion 187 EE Troubleshooting NAVI AV Appendix If you have problems operating your navigation system refer to this section The most common prob lems are listed below along with likely causes and solutions While this list is not comprehensive it sh
207. isplayed you can display Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 Touch and hold BSSM BSSM starts The 12 strongest broadcast sta ions will be P1 P12 up O To cance Cancel O Storing b stored under preset tuning keys in order from the lowest channel the storage process touch oadcast stations with BSSM may replace current broadcast stations stored in 144 preset memory Chapter 15 gum Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX Operating the AV Input Source Selecting EXT 1 or EXT 2 as AV the source 1 Touch the source icon and touch EXT 1 A CAUTION ees ee e For safety reasons visual images cannot gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt be viewed while your vehicle is in motion Page 103 To view visual images you must stop ina safe place and put on the parking brake Screen configuration before setting your route see page 20 for details D D2 Selecting AV INPUT as the source 1 AV Input is set to Video D Setting the video input gt Page 156 2 Touch the source icon and touch AV 1 Source icon INPUT Shows which source has been selected D For details refer to Selecting a source gt 2 External unit indicator Page 103 Displays any connected external units 3 Auto Manual mode indicator Operating the External Unit Shows the current mode EXT D Sw
208. ist in order of the recently used items O Active if there are items in the list and cur 4 5 rent sort is not by last used 9 Add The screen for selecting the method for regis tering the location in Address Book appears IAWN ji 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book A BURBANK GLENDALE PA gt y BE cae 5 LEMP AVE g A D Registering a Location into Address SW ROSE ST a7 i Book Page 62 PERSHING SQUARE i 10 Delete Deletes the registered locations D Deleting the entry in Address Book gt 1 Home location Picture Page 63 Sound 6 Modity Location Sorts the items in the list alphabetically This is the default sorting order Active if there are items in the list and cur ent sort is not alphabetically 7 gases Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis tance from the vehicle position Active if there are items in the list and cur ent sort is not by distance form current position The item displayed with the icon is the Page 66 home location Touch to calculate the route 11 Back D Registering Your Home and Your Favorite Returns previous screen Location Page 61 2 Favorite Location Editing the entry in Address The item displayed with the ke icon is the Book favorite location Touch to calculate the route In the Address Book menu touching Pes onthe Q gt Regis ering
209. it PIONEER TIME 03 32 KETI 1 DZ My Favorite 1 ME hat My Favorite 2 04 My Favorite 3 08 My Favorite 4 My Mix playlist You can register the track being played in one action My Favorite 1 4 playlist You can register tracks from the detailed screen information Registering a track to My Mix playlist in one action You can register the track being played to the favorite playlist called My Mix 1 Touch and hold Memo while playing back the track you want to register The track being played is registered in My Mix playlist Register tracks one by one 1 Play back the track you want to register 2 Touch WE then touch Add to My Favorites 3 Touch the playlist My Favorite 1 to My Favorite 4 or My Mix in which you want to register the track Add Tracks to Playlist Drive it TE ot My Mix 2 My Favorite 1 j My Favorite 2 Jd My Favorite 3 PE Ls My Favorite 4 4 Touch Yes The track is registered in the selected My Favorite playlist Registering multiple tracks at a time Editing a playlist or tracks wi 1 Play back the playlist that contains the You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in the tracks you want to register Music library Only the playlists and tracks in the Albums 2 Touch WES to display the list of playl group and the My Favorites group can be ists edited In the Artist group only the pronuncia tion of the artist pla
210. itching the automatic and manual func tion Page 147 The term external unit refers to future Pioneer devices that are not currently planned for or devices that allow control of basic functions although they are not fully controlled by the navi Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch gation system Two external units can be con EXT 1 or EXT 2 to select the external trolled by this navigation system When two unit external units are connected the navigation sys When the source icon is not displayed you tem allocates hem to external unit 1 or external can display it by touching the screen unit 2 For details concerning operation refer to the external unit s operation manual This section provides information on external unit operations with the navigation system that differ from those described in the external unit s operation man ual c a Ss eQ gt o D lt o e z 9 D B lt m x a gt c Z O Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases the external unit may not respond 145 H Touch keys Chapter 15 Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX 1 Send an A V lt or gt command Touch to operate the external unit Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases some func ions may not be used until you touch and hold the key 2 Sen
211. ithout the hard disk drive The following screen also may appear because ature In such a case park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch off After the emperature inside the vehicle returns to normal urn the ignition switch on FM1 76 1MHz Only the following operations are available Other functions cannot be operated e Only the FM and AM sources can be operated Preset station select cannot be operated e If the selected source before ejecting the hard disk drive is AV the AV INPUT source is available on Rear display If the selected source is DVD nothing is output to Rear display If the selected source is MIRROR the same image as Front display is output to Rear display e Rear view camera is available only when the vehicle is backing up Rear View is not available 198 he hard disk drive can not run due to low temper Route Setting Information Route search specifications Your navigation system sets a route to your desti nation by applying certain built in rules to the map data This section provides some useful information about how a route is set A CAUTION When a route is calculated the route and voice guidance for the route is automati cally set Also for day or time traffic regu lations only information about traffic regulations at the time when the route was calculated is shown One way streets and street clos
212. izing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual his section describes navigation operations such as searching the destination and per orming audio operations by voice 1 7 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Appendix Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and information such as the availability of after care Please see Display Information at the end of this manual o check the details for each item on the menu Terminology Before moving on take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in this manual They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment e Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL BOLD lettering e g MAP button MENU button e Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in brackets and bold e g Destination Settings Extra information alternative usages and other notes are presented like this e g O Touch keys which are not available at this time are grayed out References to sections that describe information related to the current topics are indicated like this e g D Setting the Route Options gt Page 34 The tab on the right corner indicates which operation the description is related to Nav igation operation or AV Audio Visual source operation For example NAVI indicates that the description is related to t
213. k that no disc is inserted and insert pronunciation your CD R RW to the disc loading slot z G If nothing is entered in a text box you can lt 2 Touch Picture and then touch Import not use that item as a voice command O Depending on which language is being from Disc switched to you may not be able to use the eis a vis in the egistered pronunciation without modifica t is displayed ioh On this screen you can select the following yee A 7 item D Available Voice Commands gt Page 167 Back to Original 3 Phone The picture originally used when the system Enter the phone number to be displayed in the was purchased is selected phone book Touch OK to complete the O Touching an option other than Import nput and return to the previous screen from Disc allows you to select a back O Up to 32 characters can be input for the ground image stored on the hard disk phone number drive Q g The edited names and phone numbers are E reflected to the dialed number history and 3 Touch a picture you want to set o the received call history However they are a not reflected to the data registered in Dial 4 oe Yes ectthefoliewi Favorites n this screen you can select the following c items 2 4 Picture No Sets the mage to be displayed when a call is Select when you want to change to another received picture Return to Step 3 F D Customizing the incoming call picture for
214. king 199 204 Tracking Display 47 Tracking dot 42 Traffic amp Weather channel 137 traffic congestion 69 Traffic event icon 70 traffic flow information 70 71 Traffic Information 69 traffic list 69 Traffic On Route 70 Traffic Settings 72 travel time 42 Travel time to destination 32 Troubleshooting 188 TV 143 TV system 204 U unit of distance and speed 97 vV VBR 110 204 Vehicle Dynamics Display 40 80 Vicinity Search 55 56 88 176 Video image 4 160 203 video input 156 View Mode 39 51 viewing angle 112 VIN number 78 Voice Commands 167 173 175 Voice guidance 204 Voice Help menu 164 VOICE icon 164 165 Voice Operation 163 Voice recognition 204 Volume 95 157 WwW Waypoint 36 42 204 wide screen mode 155 x XM NavTraffic 22 69 XM Satellite Radio 129 XM Tuner 77 213 AW IAWN g gt 5 5 Ss 2 X Register your product at http www pioneerelectronics com in Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca See Visit our website page PIONEER CORPORATION 4 1 MEGURO 1 CHOME MEGURO KU TOKYO 153 8654 JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O Box 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 0 3 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUS
215. ks A red check appears next to the items you touched To delete all favorite contents touch AI Red checks will appear next to all items 4 Touch Delete 5A message will appear asking you to con firm the deletion Touch Yes Checking the Reception Status of the XM Tuner The current XM tuner s GEX P10XMT reception status and signal strength appear on screen The information that is transmitted via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch XM Status el XM Status Status Signal Strength Radio 10 1 Status Depending on the XM tuner s GEX P10XMT eception status any one of the following may appear OK o problem Updating Updating encryption code Check antenna mproper antenna connection Not Connected 2 Signal Strength Depending on the signal strength any one of the ollowing may appear Very Strong Strong Marginal Weak No signal 3 Radio ID The radio ID appears O If you have subscribed to either XM audio only xii or XM NavtTraffic stand alone you will see Updating in the Status This is because the GEX P10XMT is constantly checking to see if you have decided to add the other service while your navigation system is turned on If you subscribe to both services the appropri ate status will be shown in the Status Emergency Info The Emergency Info screen provides
216. le information in the music library the title displayed on each screen will change accordingly z0 oO N O gt Editing a playlist or tracks gt Page 123 g Title information can only be edited when one or more tracks are recorded in the music ibrary O Once you record a CD TEXT disc the title information encoded in CD TEXT disc is also stored into the hard disk drive If you edit the itle information with the Music library the edited title will be shown Recording all tracks in a CD When you play back a CD that is not recorded it is automatically recorded in the music library hard disk drive All tracks are automatically recorded Auto in the default setting gt Setting the CD recording mode Page 158 1 Insert the CD that you want to record Recording automatically starts O To cancel the recording touch Stop When recording finishes the system returns to the normal playback screen of the CD in the blank between current track and next track O Ifthe CD is scratched or damaged no data can be recorded on that part In such a case the track that falls on that part may be skipped 118 he title information displayed on the CD play Recording a CD manually You can record only your favorite tracks in the CD 1 REC Mode is set to Manual D Setting the CD recording mode gt Page 158 O The REC Mode cannot be changed during recording
217. level 157 Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance 158 Switching the auto antenna setting 158 Setting the clock display on the video image 158 Setting the CD recording mode 158 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 158 Switching the 5 1ch setting 159 Other Functions 159 Selecting the video for Rear display 159 Operating the picture adjustment 160 Switching the backlight on or off 160 Language Code Chart for DVD 161 u n u O 5 Cl cec pO SOOO Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving 163 Basics of Voice Operation 163 Flow of voice operation 163 To start voice operation 164 Tips for Voice Operation 165 An Example of Voice Operation 165 Search for POI in vicinity 165 Search for the playlist 166 Available Voice Commands 167 Basic commands for voice operation 168 Voice commands related to navigation 168 16 Voice co Voice co ands related to hands free phoning 170 ands related to AV operation 170 After checking traffic information manually 171 Location screen A and B 171 Other Voice Commands 173 Other voice commands for navigation operation 173 Other voice commands for AV operation 175 Category list for vicinity search 176 Appendix Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Set Setting items system 18 ings 179 to be deleted 180 f system
218. libration Status 9 Touch Learning Status and then touch Reset All el 30 Calibration Status Reset All M osot Distanco Study 3 Back a Learnng Status f 182 Adjusting the Response Posi tions of the Touch Panels Touch Panel Calibration f you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi ate from the actual positions that respond to your ouch adjust the response positions of the touch panel There are two adjustment methods 4 point adjustment in which you touch four corners of he screen and 16 point adjustment in which you make fine adjustments on the entire screen g Make sure to use the supplied stylus for adjustment and gently touch the screen If you press the touch panel forcefully the touch panel may be damaged Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen Otherwise the screen is damaged Stylus supplied with navigation system 1 Press the V button The Picture Adjust screen appears 2 Press and hold the V button for two sec onds or more The 4 point touch panel adjustment screen appears 3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of the four arrows turns red 4 Press the V button The adjusted position data is saved O Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data O Press the MAP button to complete
219. list presented later 1 Start the engine After a few moments the start up screen comes on for a few seconds 2 Touch and hold the MAP button while the start up screen is displayed Clear memory screen appears 3 Touch Reset 4 Touch Yes The setting values stored in the hard disk drive return to the default or factory settings After that the navigation splash screen appears To return the entire navigation system to the default or factory settings initialize the naviga tion system in the following order 1 Press the RESET button on the hard ware 2 Initialize the user data area on the hard disk drive 3 Clear the learned data in the sensor 1 Turn the ignition switch off 2 Press the RESET button 3 Start the engine After a few moments the start up screen comes on for a few seconds 4 Touch and hold the MAP button while the start up screen is displayed Clear memory screen appears 5 Touch Clear user information from hard disk O This reset operation clears all music data recorded in the music library Note that the cleared data cannot be restored 6 Touch Yes The user area in the hard disk drive is initial ized After that the navigation system restarts 181 AW IAWN i gt 5 5 Ss 2 X 7 Press the MENU button and then touch NAVI AV f 3 o 2 2 lt Settings The setting menu appears 8 Touch Hardware and then touch 3D Ca
220. llumination When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi cle are on On is displayed When the small lamps of a vehicle are off Off is displayed If the orange white lead is not connected Off appears 8 Back Signal When the gear lever is shifted to R the sig nal switches to High or Low One of these is displayed depending on the vehicle Checking sensor learning status and driving status 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch 3D Calibration Status The 3D Calibration Status screen appears were Distance Righi Turn 1 Distance Driving distance is indicated 2 Speed Pulse Total number of speed pulses is indicated 3 Learning Status Current driving mode is indicated 4 Degree of learning Sensor learning situations of distance Dis tance right turn Right Turn left turn Left Turn and 3D detection 3D are indicated by the length of bars O When tires have been changed or chains fitted turning on the Speed Pulse allows the system to detect the fact that the tire diameter has changed and automatically replaces the value for calculating distance If the ND PG1 is connected the distance calculation value cannot be replaced auto matically 5 Speed The speed detected by the navigation system is indicated This indication may be different from the actual speed of your vehicle so please do
221. m starts dial i hn ze 2 D Registering a phone number in Dial Favor INGE AOUE EE g ites Page 90 4 To end the call touch gat the top right fth i 3 1 Touch Information in the Navigation othe str en i g menu and then touch Phone Menu Dialing a facility s phone number 2 2 Touch Dial Favorites You can make a call to facilities with phone num 5 ber data The Dial Favorites screen appears 1 Perform POI Search or Vicinity Search and display the detail information D Operation of POI Search gt Page 53 D Operation of Vicinity Search gt Page 55 3 Touch one of Favorite 1 to Favorite 5 to make a call Touch the entry to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ng touch M 2 Touch IEE of the entry you want to call 4 Toend the call touch at the top right Tete SGlesil appeals of the screen 3 Touch to make a call Detaled PO information PIONEER ELECTRONICS LONG BEACH CA 2265 EAST 220TH STREET 310 962 2000 To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BESE 88 4 To end the call touch Jat the topright Transferring the phone book f th onthe screen You can transfer the data from the phone boo 5 lt eoeeeececeeeeceeseeeeeeeeece stored in your cellular phone to the phone book Dialing from the map stored in the navigation system You can make a call by selecting the icon of a reg By transferring the phone book to the navig
222. make one 1 copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes only but you ay not otherwise copy reproduce modify make derivative works derive the structure of or reverse engineer the Data The Data contains confiden ial and proprietary information and materials and may contain trade secrets so you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in trust and not o disclose the Data or any portions in any form including by renting leasing publishing leasing sublicensing or transferring the Data to any third party You are prohibited from removing or obscuring any copyright trademark notice or estrictive legend 2 Ownership The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its icensors and they retain all ownership rights in he Data You agree not to alter remove obliter ate or obscure any copyright notice or proprie ary legend contained in or on the Data 3 Warranty Disclaimer THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS AND TELE ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY ACCURACY TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS EMPLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY AND
223. meter has changed and auto matically replaces the value for calculating distance O Ifthe ND PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper ating in Simple hybrid mode the distance cal culation value cannot be replaced automatically Map matching As mentioned the GPS and dead reckoning sys tems used by this navigation system are suscepti ble to certain errors Their calculations may on occasion place you in a location on the map where no road exists In this situation the pro cessing system understands that vehicles travel only on roads and can correct your position by adjusting it to a nearby road This is called map matching De With map matching Boa Without map matching Handling Large Errors e Ifacar phone or cellular phone is used near HEE the GPS antenna GPS reception may be lost temporarily e Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or car wax because this may block the recep tion of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals so keep the antenna clear When the positioning by GPS is O If for any reason GPS signals cannot be eceived learning and error correction are not Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com bining GPS Dead Reckoning and map match ing However in some situations these functions may not work properly and the error may become bigger AW IAWN impossible possible If GPS positioning has been operat e If signals cannot be received from mo
224. n any of Favorite 1 Favorite 5 Dial Favorites Favorite 1 Favorite 2 Favorite 3 Favorite 4 Favorite 5 4 Touch the entry you want to register The Phone Book Record screen appears 90 5 Touch OK The selected entry is registered in the corre sponding Dial Favorites Editing the entry in Phone Book You can edit the imported phone book data or add new data You can edit Name Pronunciation Phone or Picture You can also delete unnecessary data O The data cannot be transferred back to the cellular phone Editing data or adding new data 1 Touch Information in the Navigation menu and the touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Book 3 Touch Ef or Add The edit screen appears O To add data by entering it as desired touch Add 4 Select the entry you want to edit Phone Book Record Edit 1 2 3 4 1 Name Enter the name to be displayed in the phone book For more details about operations please read the following page gt Changing a name gt Page 64 O Up to 40 characters can be input for the name 2 Pronunciation You can enter the desired pronunciation inde pendently from the name The registered pro nunciation is used for voice recognition For more details about operations please read the following page D Changing a pronunciation gt Page 65 O Up to 40 characters can be input for the 1 Chec
225. n of the navigation unit correctly 192 Message Gyro Sensor is not working properly Please consult your dealer or Pioneer service center When Abnormal Gyrosensoroutput is detected What to do Write down the error code shown on the screen Turn off the power and then contact your nearest Pioneer service facility Positioning is not possible due to the hardware Please contact your dealer or Pioneer service center GPS antenna problem detected Please contact your dealer or Pioneer service center The location display is no due to hardware failure possible The location display is not possible due to failure of the GPS antenna Consult your dealer Consult your dealer This function is not available now The vertical installation angle is changed Gyro Sensor calibration is re initialized The screen cannot be displayed with sor has not been taught so the sen sor information cannot be acquired f the mounting angle of the naviga ion unit has been changed Vehicle Dynamics Display The sen If the sensor learning status reaches the Sensor Initializing the system is ready to be used The system initializes the sensor in order to operate it with the maximum performance and automatically starts re learning Excess vertical installation angle detected Please install the naviga tion unit correctly The navigation system is installed with an extreme angle exceedin
226. n the map or how to display the map amp day a oe i 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then gM fe touch Displayed Info Benes The Displayed Info screen appears On Always Displays tracking for all journeys Displayed Information Close Up View a D On This journey City Man pce On eee Displays tracking dots but erases them when rka y the navigation system is turned off when Show Mute Button y ee turning off the engine of your vehicle Off l Second Maneuver Arrow Does not display tracking dots On this screen you can operate the following items suoneanSiyuop dew Buikypow PEEL pe Show Mute Button Selects whether to display or hide the voice 2 To finish the setting touch OK guidance mute key on the map 47 Chapter 4 Modifying Map Configurations View Displays the voice guidance mute key on the map Hide Hides the voice guidance mute key on the map Show Traffic Incident Selects whether to display or hide the traffic notification icons on the map when incidents are on your route gt Checking traffic information manually gt Page 71 View Displays the icons on the map Hide Hides the icons from the map O Notification icons will not be available when your vehicle deviates from route Second Maneuver Arrow Selects whether to display or hide the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map except for Route View D About
227. n time intervals whether or not there is the traffic infor mation on your route If the navigation system detects any traffic congestion on your current oute the system tries to find a better route in the background O Following types of traffic incidents on the oute will be checked stop and go stopped raffic and closed blocked roads O Traffic flow information is taken into account only when Traffic Flow in Traffic Set tings is checked Checking traffic congestion automati cally lf there is information about traffic congestion on your current route and if an alternative route can be found the navigation system will recommend a new alternative route automatically In such a case the following screen will appear O There is no action if the system cannot find any traffic congestion information on your he system canno route or find an alternative EEA Distance from the current position of your vehicle to the point of entry into the new route Difference in distance and travel time between existing route and new route On this screen you can select the following items New The recommended route is displayed on the screen Current The current route is displayed on the screen OK The displayed route is set O When no selection is made the screen returns to previous screen Checking traffic information manually Touching notification icon on the
228. n you say the street name say the street type together lt e g XXXX street xxxx avenue xxxx road xxxxx boule vard etc gt e Some operation may be skipped depending on the address e If you don t know the street name or house number you can say Area so that your destination can be set to the main point of that city or street Search by Points of interest Destination POI gt lt PO Name gt Location Screen A Destination gt POI gt Go To lt PO Name gt gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation Destination gt POI gt Waypoint lt PO name gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Making phone call to POI Destination gt POI gt Call lt PO name gt Touch VOICE icon to call that facility Only when the phone number is registered in the facility Displaying the map of POI Destination gt POI gt Display lt PO name gt Display the map of that facility s surroundings Search by telephone number Destination gt Telephone Number gt Say the telephone number you want to search gt Location Screen A If mul tiple facilities exist with the same phone number the facilities you intend may not be displayed Note You can say 10 digits telephone number only 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available Search by entry on the address book Destinat
229. nce cannot be attenuated or muted If you want to mute the navigation guidance voice temporarily use KE on the naviga tion map screen 157 wi lensi A olpny y im poyejas Bulyjag olpny y Bulziwoysng O gt w xo z EE Changing the voice output of the gt lt Customizing the Audio Setting related Chapter 16 with Audio Visual navigation guidance You can set the speaker to output the navigation guidance and phone voice etc 1 Touch Guide Tel SP in the System Set tings menu Each touch of Guide Tel SP changes the settings as follows e Left SP Uses only the front left speaker e Right SP Uses only the front right speaker e L R SP Uses both the front right and left speakers Switching the auto antenna set ting If the blue lead of the navigation system is con nected to the antenna control terminal of the vehicle select either of the following settings e Radio The antenna extends or turns on only when the audio source is the FM or AM The antenna is stored or turned off when the source is switched to another e Power The antenna extends or turns on when the ignition switch is turned on The antenna is stored or turned off when the igni tion switch is turned off 1 Touch Auto ANT in the System Set tings Touching Auto ANT switches between Radio and Power O Regardless of whether Radio or Power is selected tu
230. nd Slope Displays the vehicle s vertical movement The side represents the rising angle and the side the falling angle Using XM Tuner and Other Information 80 Direction Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling in Clock Current time is displayed Adjust Look Touch Adjust Look to display a screen for selecting the panel pattern Touch one of the patterns from among those displayed onscreen o change the panel to the selected pattern mum and minimum green line values indicated in Acceleration and Side Acceleration are reset O You cannot change the speedometer at the center O Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings menu enables you to perform a demon stration with random values g Ifyou touch Peak Hold Reset the maxi 81 IAWN g O S iY xo gt uoiewo u 194 0 pue 13uUN L WX Busy i IAWN 8 laydeyg UOI EUOJU 194 0 pue 1un L WX Buisn 82 Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning Hands free Phoning Overview A CAUTION e For your safety avoid talking on the phone as much as possible while driving If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech nology this navigation system can be connected to your cellular phone wirelessly Using this hands free function you can operate the naviga tion system to make or receive phone calls You can also transfer the phone book data stored in your cellular phone
231. ne Settings Connection Registr ation Device Name PIONEER HOO NAVI Password EEE OK Touch Connection Touch the name of the cellular phone that you want to connect When a connection is successfully estab ished a connection complete message appears and the system returns to the phone enu screen g To cancel the connection to your cellular phone touch Cancel g If connection fails check whether your cel lular phone is waiting for a connection and then repeat the procedure from step 4 85 z IAW Qa gt w xo o Buluoyd 9aij spuepH Buispn HE Editing the device name gt q z Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning You can change the device name to be displayed on your cellular phone Default is PIONEER HDD NAVI 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 3 Touch Device Name 4 Touch any key to enter the name you want to set and then touch OK gt About Keypad operation gt Page 29 O Upto 20 characters can be entered for a device name Editing the password You can change the password to be used for authentication on your cellular phone Default is 1111 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 3 Touch Password 4 Touch any key to enter the passw
232. nected icon This icon shows whether the cellular phone fea turing Bluetooth technology is connected or not You can select between display and non display H Connected me Disconnected O This is available only when the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected gt Selecting display or non display for the Bluetooth Connected icon gt Page 48 21 Mute Voice Guidance icon Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice Guidance You can select between display and non display D Selecting display or non display for the Mute Voice Guidance icon gt Page 47 22 Second Maneuver Arrow Indicates the turning direction after next You can select between display and non display D Selecting display or non display for the Sec ond Maneuver Arrow gt Page 48 23 POI icon The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of he intersection when available data exists 24 Suggested lane information The traveling direction screen is displayed when you approach a interchange junction or exit The suggested lane is indicated with a green arrow Roads without turn by turn instructions Routable roads the route displayed and high ighted in purple have only basic data and can only be used to plot a navigable route Pioneer avigation will only display a navigable route on he map only the arrival guidance for the desti nation or a waypoint is available Please review and obey all local traffic rules alo
233. nformation to display gt Page 72 lf you want to check the traffic information details at the map move the scroll cursor onto an icon such as amp and touch This allows you to view place names and other detail information Traffic flow information icon and line Red yellow or green blinking lines may appear on either side of a road In addition to these blink ing lines a round icon with a number may appear on the map The number in the icon indicates the actual average speed of that specific area These colors indicate the average speed at which traffic is flowing along these streets Here is a guide to the colors and the average speed they indicate Traffic flow icon Red average speed in this area is between 5 ph to 15 mph 8 km h to 24 km h Yellow average speed in this area is between 20 ph to 40 mph 32 km h to 64 km h Green average speed in this area is 45 mph 72 m h or faster An icon without a number indi cates the average speed of the road is more than 45 mph 72km h O The traffic flow line can be used only when Traffic Settings is selected D Selecting traffic information to display gt Page 72 If you want to check the traffic information details at the map move the scroll cursor onto an icon such as and touch E This allows you to view place names and other detail information Setting alternative route to avoid traffic congestion The navigation system checks at certai
234. ng a source gt Page 103 displayed Screen configuration Substitute icon GEX P10XMT GEX P920XM xe All Ch Mode 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 1 2 8 4 6 c 2 gt Ko gt gt lt o i 3 Lol R v 2 c 2 ples 2 XM band indicator boat i miei Shows the XM band which has been selected TAE ERS ER 3 XM channel number indicator ai a Eee Shows XM channel number the tuner is currently TF sok Seek bs ar tuned to List Moen Band Spent 4 XM station name indicator Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner is currently tuned to 5 XM channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all chan nels in All Ch Mode and select a channel from selected category in Category Mode gt Switching the XM channel select mode gt Page 130 6 XM channel category Shows the category of broadcast channel 129 Me 7 XM station name logo Chapter 13 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 8 Shows channe 9 Shows O The message ON THE AIR disappears the navigation system cannot receive XM uner reception for some reason you use GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM he logo for channel name is not available t g t Detail information he detailed information of the broadcast currently being received
235. ng angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been selected 9 Play time indicator ive seconds the icon lt lt or B changes into Shows the elapsed playing time of the current lt KI or B gt When this happens fast rewind fast chapter orward continues even if you release ka a or bP To resume playback at a desired point Touch key operation ouch P E lt 4 or gt gt Playback screen page1 g You can also perform these operations by 2 4 using the TRK lt gt button 3 Stop playback 4 Display the DVD menu You can display the menu by touching Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing Touching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu For details refer to the instructions provided with the disc 5 Display the DVD menu keypad 6 Frame by frame playback or slow motion playback Touch and hold to start slow motion playback Touching this during playback pauses the image and each touch forwards a frame To return to normal playback touch gt I O With some discs images may be unclear dur 10 13 ing frame by frame playback or slow motion playback Menu screen i O There is no sound during slow motion play back O Reverse slow motion playback is not possible 7 Switch next page of touch keys
236. ng either i or briefly O Ifyou keep touching gay or METEJ you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tun ing starts as soon as you release the keys You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 114 3 Tune in strong signals D Tuning in strong signals gt Page 114 4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen cies D Storing the strongest broadcast frequen cies gt Page 114 5 Select a FM band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired FM band is displayed FM 1 FM 2 or FM 3 O This function is convenient to prepare differ ent preset lists for each band Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you automati cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen cies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those fre quencies with a touch of the key 1 Touch and hold BSM BSM starts The six strongest broadcast fre quencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 P6 in order of their signal strength O To cancel the storage process touch Cancel O Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 P6 Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch Local 2 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on
237. ng range is approximately 10 miles 16 km square from the scroll cursor This can be used when Vicinity Search is selected in Short Cut Selection D Changing Shortcut gt Page 49 1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor to the place where you want to search for POI 2 Touch g The shortcut menu appears 3 Touch g See Step 2 of Searching for the facilities around the current position for the following operations D Searching for the facilities around the current position gt Page 55 O The distance indicated in the search result is the distance from the scroll cursor to the acility O The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your avorite categories Touching the shortcuts icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate gory D Registering deleting POI Shortcuts gt Page 58 O Vicinity Search in the navigation menu searches your surroundings On the other hand in the case of Pi in the Shortcut menu Page 45 the area around the scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will be searched Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the Telephone Number If you know the telephone number of your desti nation you can quickly search for your destina tion by specifying the telephone number You can also search for the phone number Phone on Address Book 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Telephone Search The telephone number entry scr
238. ng the TRK lt gt button Switching to the list display You can select a desired channel from the list dis pla gt 4 You can switch the mode between y Selecting a channel from the X display gt Page 131 channel list Switching the XM channel select mode he two meth ods for selecting and listing the channel All Ch Mode You can select a channel from all channels when you operate Category Mode You can select a channel within selected cate gory when you operate 5 Select an XM band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed XM 1 XM 2 or XM 3 This is useful for switching the preset 6 Switching the touch keys to next page 7 Memorizing the current song The song title and artist name being broadcast will be memorized in My Mix When a song that matches the song information memorized in My Mix is broadcast you can tune the channel to the one that is broadcasting that song gt Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song gt Page 132 8 Setting the notification of the memorized songs You can set an alert for the songs memorized in My Mix You can also delete the memorized song D Setting the alert for each memorized song Page 132 gt Deleting the memorized songs gt Page 132 9 Selecting an XM c You can select an XM c ing the desired channe hannel directly hann
239. ng the high ighted route For your safety o turn by turn directions will be displayed on hese roads When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this oad the icon Xx will be displayed beside the direction arrow indicating that the guidance is not available with this type of road The icon q will be indicated for roads that have available guidance The Close up of intersection function Auto Reroute function Changing the view to Guide Mode or Route View are not available 43 5 Aejdsiq de ay peay o mon PR WES Celli pe EE Changing the scale of the map gt q z Chapter 3 How to Read the Map Display Touching or amp allows you to change the map scale Touch and holding or amp allows you to change the scale in smaller step within a range of 25 yards to 1000 miles 25 meters to 2000 kilom eters When the view mode is set to Map Mode or Guide Mode Direct scale key is displayed Touching Direct scale key changes the map to the selected scale directly Direct scale key O The icon of the entry in Address Book and he traffic information icon are displayed when the map scale is 10 miles 20 km or ower O Traffic lines are displayed when the map scale is 2 5 mile 6 km or lower g POlicons are displayed when the map scale is 0 75 mile 1 km or lower 44 Scroll the map to the location you want to see Touching anywhere on the map chang
240. ngi tude can be obtained and positioning errors are somewhat greater xipueddy Positioning by dead reckoning The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system also calculates your position The current loca ion is measured by detecting driving distance with the speed pulse the turning direction with he Gyrosensor and inclination of the road with he G sensor The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate changes of altitude and corrects for discrepan cies in the distance traveled caused by driving along winding roads or up slopes Also the navi gation system learns the driving conditions and stores information in the memory thus as you drive more the precision of the positioning becomes more accurate 183 NAVI AV i Appendix The method of positioning changes as follows depending on whether the speed pulse of your vehicle is detected or not 3D hybrid mode This is active when the speed pulse is detected nclination of a street can be detected Simple hybrid mode When the speed pulse is not detected position ing is performed in this mode Only horizontal movement is detected so it becomes less accu rate Also when the positioning by GPS is not available such as when your vehicle enters a ong tunnel the discrepancy between your actual and calculated position may become bigger O The speed pulse data comes from the speed sensing circuit The location of this speed sensing circuit depen
241. ns You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other persons or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copy right trade secret patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Software The Software is copyrighted and may not be copied even if modi fied or merged with other products You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or propri etary legend contained in or on the Software You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party pro vided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License Agree ment 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are pro vided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LICEN SOR S for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be collectively referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLU SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The Software is complex and may contain some nonconformities defects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Software will meet your
242. nt location say Vicinity Search 165 AW IAYN D10A YIM Wa shg uo1eBiney nog HulyesadoO L4 1 4dey NAVI AV q Chapter 17 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice The message Vicinity search Please request POI category appears and the navigation system pronounces that message Say GAS Station The message Vicinity search Gas station appears The map of the nearest gas station is shown gt rane O For categories that can be used as the voice commands refer to Category list for vicinity search D Refer to Category list for vicinity search Page 176 6 Touch the VOICE icon Say Next or Previous to select the desired facilities R Uana E PEREIS J ESTER ST p ae LeS APLE ST After confirming the location say Set As Destination If there is no route the system starts the route calculation If the route is already set touch the VOICE icon to start route calculation 166 Search for the playlist In this example you want to search for a playlist and play that playlist 1 Touch the VOICE icon when the audio source is LIBRARY 2 Say Music Search 3 Say the desired group Album Artist Genre My Favorites If the desired group is already selected you can skip this step 4 Say the name of the playlist you want to play The worlds first sound vision smd Comming gener ation Act
243. nt to register and touch OK The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears D Editing the entry in Address Book Page 63 5 Touch OK Completes the registration Changing the Background Pic ture Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic tures before creating a CD R RW and Pre cautions when changing the Splash Screen D Limitations for importing pictures gt Page 101 D Precautions when changing the Splash Screen gt Page 102 n the menu operation screen you can customize a picture for the background Some pictures are already stored in the hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG format pictures such as a pic ture from your digital camera by using a CD R RW You can use pictures as background pic tures by burning them onto a CD R RW with your PC and inserting it into the navigation sys tem The following types of background pictures can be changed Splash Screen The screen that appears when the Navigation system starts up e Navigation Background Background pic ture of the navigation menu screen AV Background Background picture during the operation of audio source screen Here a method for changing the background pic ture is described with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the naviga tion system as the background picture 1 Check that no disc is inserted and insert y
244. ntly being received to the preset list You can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key O Touch to recall the preset frequency O Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory 2 Touch Perform manual tuning To perform manual tuning touch a or briefly The frequencies move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning keep touching pimes or or about one second and release The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is found O You can cancel seek tuning by touching either EEE or EE briefly O Ifyou keep touching Raa or METEJ you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tun ing starts as soon as you release the keys You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 3 Tune in strong signals gt Tuning in strong signals Page 116 115 wi olpey pue aang GA U 1Ng aa4n0g AY a4 Buisn AF T Koh 11 be EE 4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen gt lt Chapter 11 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio cies D Storing the strongest broadcast frequen cies gt Page 116 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you automati cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen cies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those fre
245. o not use this function for entertainment purposes Wide variety of facility information for Points of Interest POI search You can search for your destination from all areas Approximately 12 million POIs are included in he database Some POI information may not be accurate or may become inaccurate through the passage of ime Please directly contact the POI to verify the accuracy of the information about the POI which appears in this database POI information is sub ject to change without notice Auto reroute function f you deviate from the set route the system will e calculate the route from that point so that you emain on track to the destination O This function may not work in certain areas Auto CD title and MP3 file listing Title lists are automatically displayed when a CD or MP3 disc is played This system provides easy to operate audio functions that allow playback simply by selecting an item from the list AW IAWN Q gt ty xo Daa p waj sXg ay Bulsp aiojag NAVI AV i Chapter 1 Before Using the System Compatible voice recognition system Connecting the supplied microphone will enable voice operation for both the navigation and AV functions Original image assignment You can store your own pictures on a CD R in JPEG format and import original images in this navigation system These imported images can be set as a background or splash screen or as a picture
246. oads including toll areas O The system may calculate a route that includes toll road even if On is selected Avoid Ferry This setting controls whether ferry crossings should be taken into account FU Calculate a route that may include ferries FZAlon Calculate a route that avoids ferries O The system may calculate a route that includes ferryway even if On is selected Avoid Freeway This setting controls whether freeways may be included in the route calculation Fior Calculate a route that may include freeways Aton alculate a route that avoids freeways O The system may calculate a route that includes freeway even if On is selected Time restrictions This setting controls whether streets or bridges have traffic restrictions during a certain time should be taken into account g Ifyou want to set your route to avoid opened bridges select On g On Calculate a route while avoiding streets or bridges with traffic restrictions during a certain ime Z torn Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric ions O The system may calculate a route that includes streets or bridges that are subject to traffic restrictions during a certain time even if On is selected A CAUTION If the time difference is not set correctly the navigation system cannot consider traffic regulations correctly Set the time difference correctly see page 96 Setting the
247. oads or freeways are included in the route to the destina tion or waypoints even though a route is set to avoid them You can identify these condition by the icons gt Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 The house number entered does not exist in the database for the specified What to do lf the current route is not desired set destination or waypoints that do not pass through a ferry route toll roads or freeways Re enter he existing house number Or proceed to the next step without street entering the house number and set he main point of that street as your destination This area does not contain any POI of Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move the selected type not exist in the surrounding areas o another location and perform the Vicinity Search again Failed to make the route profile In rare cases a route calculation e Retry error may occur e Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this message persists There is no Traffic List There is no available traffic informa ove to the location where you can tion now ion and again receive the XM hen try the opera avTraffic informa ion There is no pictures folder Please create Pictures folder and store Cannot load the image because the Pictures folder is not found in the Use the appropriate data af ing Limitations for importing pic er read JPEG files
248. of the stock you want to The screen displays a list of stock prices delete l Although the stock price information dis e appears next to the ticker you ouched played onscreen is updated every 30 sec onds approx these prices are not real time values O To delete all registered stocks touch AII Red checks will appear next to all tickers 4 Touch Delete A message will appear asking you to confirm 1 Touch Information in the navigation the deletion menu and then touch Stock Info Registering stocks to be displayed O s EY xo O gt 5 Touch Yes 2 Touch Add 3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you want to display then touch OK Enter Stock Ticker uoiewno u 194 0 pue un 1 WX Buisn 75 EE Storing browsable information gt a z i to v Q Oo Using XM Tuner and Other Information XM special contents can be stored as My Favor ites so that it can be accessed without search ing every time an update is needed O The displayed items depend on the informa tion that is sent from each station O My Favorites can store up to 50 items 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Set My Favorites The screen will display a list of categories The information appearing onscreen is automati cally updated at regular intervals 2 Toucha category you want to browse from the list Set My Favorites Sports 3
249. oftware is complex and may contain some nonconformities defects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Software will meet your needs or expecta tions that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pionee does not make any representations or warranties regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft ware in terms of its accuracy reliability or other wise 3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION COM PENSATORY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST INCOME LOST SALES OR USINESS EXPENDITURES INVESTMENTS OR MITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY USINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAM ES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR ABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PIO EER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR HOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD F SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID OMNZS gt 32EwWOAD ep UALLY OR WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF WARRANTY LIABILITY MISREPRESENTATION AND OT EER S WARRA OF LIABILITY SET FORTH TORTS IF PIO OR LIMITATIO AGREEMENT SHALL OR WHATSOEVER BE HELD LIABILITY SHALL NOT EX 60 OF THE PRICE PAI Some states do not allow
250. om he end of the text Continuing to touch the button deletes all of the text 8 City Touch if you want to specify the destination city or area first This is available only when 4 is blank 9 Sym 0 9 nput text with marks such as amp or or numbers IAWN i O Touch to toggle the selection 10 Street Touch if you want to return the street input mode This is available only when city name is blank 11 Center This can be selected when you enter a city or area name first Touch this button to display the central point of the entered city or area Touching OK searches the route to the cen tral point Proceed to Step 9 You can customize the keyboard type to be displayed on the screen D Customizing the keyboard layout gt Page 96 w A 2 G 9 ao pA S z o 3 Auto fill in function Street A24 COUNTY HWY A24_ The previously entered characters are stored for each state and each search function The next time a character is entered suggested characters will be shown For example if E 220TH ST has been entered in the past when you input just the letter E E 220TH ST will be filled in automatically The manually input characters are displayed in yellow and the suggested characters are displayed in white so you can distinguish them To confirm the filled in characters touch OK 29 7 Touch the street from the list NAV
251. on formation lt Address Return Route Search Home Overview ay Destination Vicinity History Search Search ae Se ae P 58 67 P 57 P 55 P 33 P 58 61 Information menu P 70 P 69 P71 P 72 It formation Settings G i Traffic On i Traffic Traffic Phone Menu Route Flow Settings My XM Status Favorites P 87 P 87 90 P 88 90 P 89 P 87 92 LL a Ly LS ey Phone Menu Phone Book Dial Read Favorites Bus Card Phone Settings P 87 92 P 84 205 AW IAWN i gt 5 5 3 2 X aa Map menu NAVI AV Appendix 206 P 49 ae mem Map rs P 50 P 50 P 51 it Ay 1 Displayed Info Short Cut Selection Overlay ap Lege View Mode POI Day Night Display Automatic AY Guide Road Color Mode P 51 P 51 P 51 Displayed Information Close Up View City Map Tracking Display Show Mute Button Show Traffic Incident Second Maneuver Arrow Displayed Information Bluetooth Connected Address Book Icon 3D Landmark P 47 P 47 P 47 P 47 P 48 P 48 P 48 P
252. on you will need to set up the navigation system or using that function This entails registering your cellular phone with the navigation system and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between the navigation system and your cellular phone Registering your cellular phone You need to register your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect it for the first time A total of five phones can be egistered Two registration methods are avail able e Registration from the navigation syste e Registration from the cellular phone O Once you have registered a phone you can select that cellular phone from the list to con nect it without registration g If you try to register more than five cellular phones the system will ask you to select one of the registered cellular phones to overwrite D Connecting a registered cellular phone gt Page 85 O The default device name displayed on the cel lular phone is PIONEER HDD NAVI The default password is 1111 84 Operating from the navigation system 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol ogy on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction manual of your cellular phone Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen
253. on System with Voice No sounds can be output during ea 1 Touch the VOICE icon Navigation screen ISON AVE A y E 2 A sound vision sou 01 Drive it May ove as 02 Eye to eye ret 03 Integration a ree 04 PREMIER Y Yo rec 05 Brilliance O Depending on the operating state of the navi gation system some commands displayed in Voice Help may be unavailable Available commands are in white and unavailable com mands are in gray When using voice operation for the first time Until you are familiar with this system it is rec ommended that you stop the vehicle in a safe place and refer to the commands displayed in the Voice Help menu a list of the words you can speak When your vehicle is parked with the parking brake on see the Voice Help menu and speak voice command on that menu except for some cases Voice Help menu Basic Operaten Destination Map Operation Route Options Traffic Information Other Operation VOICE icon When voice command is possible When voice command is not accepted 164 O When you say Voice Help the navigation system pronounces the displayed words that can be vocalized g If no voice icon is displayed check to see whether the microphone is properly con nected and turn the power on again O If there are multiple pages the voice help menu can be switched by using ggg or EEE on the screen You can also switch
254. on to call your home Only when the phone number is registered in your home Setting your home to waypoint have set the destination Display the map of surroundings on your home Destination gt Display Home gt Display the map of surroundings on your home Display the map of surroundings on your destination Destination Display Destination gt Display the map of surroundings on your destination Set the map location as your destination route calculation Set the map location as your waypoint point gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation to the address book Basic Operation gt Registration gt The system register that point and Information edit screen appears Operating the navigation map scale Map Operation gt Change Scale XXXX lt kilo gt meter s Scale lt 25meters 50meters 100meters 200meters 500meters 1kilometer 2kilometers 5kilometers 10kilometers 20kilometers 50kilometers 100kilometers a i wn a 5 a 5 D 3 w kzi is S 5 200kilometers 500kilometers 1000kilometers 2000kilometers gt Map screen will be changed to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is km e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode AW IAWN i Destination gt Waypoint Home gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation This function is only available if you Scroll the navigation map or switch the sc
255. onding or a different key is responding CD recording is not possible Touch keys deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch for some reason A disc that cannot be recorded such as MP3 disc or DVD video is inserted Perform the touch panel calibration Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch Panels Touch Panel Cali bration gt Page 182 A disc other than a normal music CD cannot be recorded CD recording doesn t stop though the record progress indicator shows 100 Music Library recording will be can celed after playback of the current track is finished The recording mode stops at the interval of the tracks Wait until the current track has ended or change the source manu ally NO SIGNAL is displayed at the right corner on the map While waiting for a response from the XM tuner Wait for a while and try the operation again You are in an area that cannot receive XM tuner reception Move into an area that can receive XM tuner reception Your current location provides very poor reception Change your location UPDATING is displayed at the right corner on the map Service subscription is either XM audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone Since the GEX P10XMT is capable of receiving both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service if you are sub scribed to only one or the other the system checks to see if you have added another service to
256. onunciation 65 125 167 Q Q 150 U U0 UU R Radio 113 115 Radio ID 77 131 Rear Display 4 159 190 198 Rear View 21 40 156 Rear view camera 21 156 160 eceived call history 87 Received Calls 92 ecording 117 118 119 158 191 Region number 203 Regional Settings 95 Restore Factory Settings 102 Roads without turn by turn instructions 43 Romeo 203 ROOT 109 110 Route Calculation Condition 32 34 Route Condition 34 Route confirmation screen 32 route guidance 33 212 Route View 39 S Scroll cursor 44 56 Scroll mode 44 Scroll the map 44 SECAM 204 Second Maneuver Arrow 43 48 Sensor 98 183 184 192 Set My Favorites 76 Settings menu 27 95 207 Shortcut menu 45 49 208 hort Cut Selection 49 huffle Albums 142 huffle Songs 142 mple hybrid mode 184 192 simulated sound stage 151 single session 101 SIRIUS Satellite Radio 133 slow motion playback 111 Sound 66 source 103 source level adjustment 153 speaker balance 151 152 Speed Pulse 97 98 185 Splash Screen 100 102 Steering Remote Control 84 104 163 stock prices 75 street list screen 31 street name or city name input screen 29 Stylus 182 subtitle language 112 subwoofer 152 158 Summer Time 96 System Settings 105 149 153 209 T Telephone Search 57 Text box 29 Time difference 96 Time Restrictions 35 Title display 106 117 120 Touch Panel Calibration 182 track edit mode 124 Trac
257. oosted the Q curve characteristics of each band Custom1 Low Mid High Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate A separate custom curve can be created Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves that you create Adjustments can be made with a 3 band parametric equalizer Custom2 Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate If you select this curve the effect is reflected all audio source e Band 1 Touch Equalizer in the Audio Settings You can select the band you want to adjust menu e Frequency You can select which frequency to be set as 2 Touch desired equalizer the center frequency a ee z e Level You can adjust the decibel dB level of the selected band e Q You can select the details of the curve char acteristics The following figure shows the characteristic image oO w pej Q iy oO i z O When Flat is selected no supplement or Narrow1 Narrow2 o correction is made to the sound This is E useful to check the effect of the equalizer A A E curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve Wide1 Wide2 Adjusting equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired e A separate Custom1 curve can be created for 1 each source If you make adjustments when a curve Super Bass Powerful Natural Vocal Flat or Custom is selected the equal 2 Touch Eq
258. or the playlist currently play ing or temporary displayed The Ej icon on the left indicates that the item is a 2 5 ment System SCMS that was developed to 3 Playlist name indicator 3 prevent second generation or serial copies Shows the playlist currently playing D O Recording to the music library is not possible 4 Track indicator R from media such as CD Rs in which MP3 Shows the number and title of the track currently files are stored playing z Q g When you are recording a CD with no track 5 Playback method indicator s intervals such as a live concert CD if the Shows which playback method has been gt engine stops and the power turns off the selected F sound may break in a track when the music 6 Artist name indicator data is played back Shows the name of the artist currently playing 3 Also see Notes for Hard Disk Drive for 7 Play time indicator morg cautions about handling hard disk Shows the elapsed playing time of the current E griye track m feg 5 119 Mm Playlist and the Bj icon indicates that the item gt lt q Using the AV Source Music Library is a Track Title display usic recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com O If notitle information exists in the Gracenote Database on
259. ord you want to set and then touch OK gt About Keypad operation Page 29 O Four to eight characters can be entered for a password 86 Receiving a phone call You can use the navigation system to receive a call hands free The map screen shows the icon while your cellu lar phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol ogy is connected You can receive a hands free call only when the cellular phone is connected Connecting icon oR i wAn AL 4 ag jie er ae oy off ae ine Answering an incoming call The system informs you that it is receiving a call by displaying a message and producing a ring sound once 1 When there is an incoming call touch When there is an incoming call you can reject the call by touching BESE O During a call the fis displayed at the right hand side of the screen 2 Toend the call touch at the top right of the screen The call ends If the received voice is too quiet to hear you can adjust the volume of the received voice gt Phone Voice gt Page 95 O Depending on the caller ID service the phone number of the received call may not be dis played Unknown appears instead O You may hear a noise when you hang up the phone Making a phone call eoccccccccccccccccccc ccs mm When you make a call to the phone number in Received Calls without you can add lt in front of that number by touching Direct dialing To delete
260. ormation can include the track title the artist s name the album title the music genre the year of production comments and other data The contents can be freely edited using soft ware with ID3 Tag editing functions Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters the informa tion can be viewed when the track is played back 1SO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD ROM folders and files For the ISO9660 format there are regulations for the following two levels Level 1 The file name is in 8 3 format the name consists of up to 8 characters half byte English capital letters and half byte numerals and the _ sign with a file extension of three characters Level 2 The file name can have up to 31 characters including the separation mark and a file extension Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies Extended formats Joliet File names can have up to 64 characters Romeo File names can have up to 128 characters Linear PCM LPCM Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation which is he signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs Generally DVDs are recorded with higher sam pling frequency and bit rate than CDs Therefore DVDs can provide higher sound quality m3u Playlists created using the WINAMP software have a aylist file extension m3u O Menu A list of options shown on the display c
261. ot displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys 3 5 4 UZEye te eye 7 03 integr ation 04 PREMER 6 8 9 1 Select a desired track from the list Touch a desired track to play O Touching H or H switches to the next or previ ous page in the list 2 Playback and Pause Touching I switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip the track forward or back ward Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next track Touching ke once skips to the start of the cur rent track Touching again will skip to the previ ous track Touch and hold fast backward or forward O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 4 View upper contents Touching displays the contents of the upper playlist or group O You cannot touch on the group selec tion screen D Relationship of groups playlists and tracks Page 120 5 Display group selection s creen You can search a track from categories gt Search for a playlist gt Page 121 6 Display the details information screen Displays the information about the track or playl ist displayed in blue on the track list On the details information you can delete the track or edit the track information D Editing a playlist or tracks gt Page 123 7 Touch and hold Register the track in My Mix D
262. ou to ravel in the opposite direction to your current heading In such cases you are instructed to urn around so please turn around safely by ollowing the actual traffic rules e In some cases guidance may direct you past your destination and then indicate a U turn to get back to it e In some cases a route may begin on the oppo site side of a railway or river from your actual current location If this happens drive towards your destination for a while and try route cal culation again e When there is a traffic congestion or closure ahead if driving through the traffic congestion closure is better than taking the detour a etour route may not appear here may be instances when the starting oint and the destination point are not on the ighlighted route e The number of traffic circle exits displayed on the screen may differ from the actual number of roads e FU Aa Auto Reroute e Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more than 0 02 mile Approx 30m from the route e The Auto Reroute function does not work in the following cases when your vehicle is not on a street when you are too close to your destination when your vehicle is on a ferry when driving on a road inside a facility when driving on a traffic circle when driving on the routes are described in Roads not used in calculations e The system assumes the driver deviated either intentionally or inadvertently from
263. ould answer your most common problems If a solution to your problem cannot be found here con tact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility Problems in the screen Symptom Cause Power doesn t turn on The naviga Leads and connectors are incorrectly tion system doesn t operate connected Action See Confirm once more that all connec tions are correct The fuse is blown Rectify the reason for the fuse blow ing then replace the fuse Be very sure to install a correct fuse with the same rate oise and other factors are causing rectly the internal memory to operate incor Refer to Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Set tings and carry out appropriate mea sures Page 179 e hard disk drive is not working ecause the temperature is xtremely low or high oS D Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle falls or rises When the ignition switch is turned iin is system confirms whether a disc This is a normal operation Turn the system off and the check the wiring Wait until the inside of the vehicle warms up Consult your authorized Pioneer dealer ON or turned to ACC the motor is loaded or not sounds The navigation does not boot up The power cable is not wired cor rectly The hard disk drive is not running because the temperature is too low The hard disk drive is defective Yo
264. ound of a certain quality we recom improves with an increased bit rate This prod mend only using discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps Playing MP3 file on the DVD R RW is not supported About folders and MP3 files An outline of a CD ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below Subfolders are shown as folders i the folder currently selected O The following figure is an example of the tier structure in the CD The numbers in the figu indicate the order in which folder numbers are assigned and the order to be played back Indicates the order in which folder numbers are assigned JJ Indicates each file The number is assigned i the order of the track to be played back e t tt First tier Second tier Third tier Notes e This product assigns folder numbers The user can not assign folder numbers f you are using a folder that does not contain an MP3 file the folder itself will display but you will not be able to see any files in the folder P3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back However there is a delay when starting playback on discs with numerous iers For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers tis possible to play back up to 253 folders on one disc 201 AW IAYN g gt 5 5 3 2 X mm Glossary NAVI AV Appendix This glossary explains some of the terms used in the manual 3D
265. our CD R RW to the disc loading slot 2 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Background Picture Setting The picture selected for each screen is indi cated on the right side of Splash Screen Navigation Background and AV Back ground items 3 Touch Splash Screen Navigation Background or AV Background me PIONEER Originat Original Original A Back to Original j Trport trom Dise me AURORA m CARBON is Ory VU DOLPHIN The list of the pictures stored in the CD R RW is displayed On this screen you can select the following item Back to Original Back to PIONEER Original The picture originally used when the system was purchased is selected O Touching an option other than Import from Disc allows you to select a back ground image stored on the hard disk drive 5 Toucha picture you want to set 6 Touch OK If you touch OK the background image starts changing After a short while the con firmation screen appears O When the image has a large file size it takes more time to change the Back ground Picture Do not perform other oper ations until the message Updating Please do not turn off the power dis appears g If you want to change to another picture touch Back to return to Step 4 O When the picture starts to change do not turn off the vehicle engine until the mes sage appears to indicate that the picture has f
266. owing setting when combining the multi channel processor system A CAUTION e DO NOT enter this setting before you con nect the multi channel processor system If this setting is entered the RCA SUB WOOFER OUTPUT or NON FADING OUT PUT will output maximum volume for the multi channel processor system Pio neer is not responsible for any damage to the speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warning O This setting is possible only when the optical cable connection box supplied with the Multi channel processor is connected to the navi gation system 1 Touch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn source off When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen 2 Touch 5 1Ch Setup in the System Set tings menu If you touch 5 1Ch Setup it will be turned On If you touch 5 1Ch Setup again to turn Off the setting 5 1Ch Setup will disap pear If you want to turn it On again you have to repeat the procedure from the Step Other Functions Selecting the video for Rear display You can choose either to show the same image as the front screen or to show the selected source on the Rear display 1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper ation screen 2 Touch the source icon and then touch REAR SCREEN AV Source Menu UBRARY EPRE AM Pit Tv REAR SCREEN MIRROR Each touch of REAR SCREEN changes the
267. pace means free space of the music library In some cases even when about 10 of free space is left no more music tracks may be recorded due to system restric tion 99 IAWN suol ung uoljeBiaey 104 shulyjag jesauayg ayy BuiAyipow OL BE Ke hd be 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu NAV Chapter 10 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions then touch Hardware 2 Touch Hard Disk Info Hard disk space Free Space Used Space Registering the Home Location and Favorite Location You can register one home location and one favorite location You can change the registered information later You might find it useful to regis ter your workplace or a relative s home as your favorite location 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Defined Locations 2 Touch Go to When registering your home location touch Home Set Home and Go To 3 Search for a location to register You can select a method of location search Select Search method Wir po AE Map Search Search Search a y7 Waccress Wostinston Foiophone Vicinity Book History Soarch Soarch we F D Address Search gt Page 28 D Information on searching for locations to register gt Page 53 to 58 O Ifyou select Map Search move the scroll cursor to the place you want to set and touch OK 100 4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you wa
268. pears Do you want to erase the phone book before receiving business cards Yes Deletes all phone numbers stored in the phone book and then transfers the data No Keeps the current entries and then adds new data to the phone book Duplicate data can not be consolidated 89 NAVI Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning O If you want to keep the existing phone book select No 4 Check that the following screen is dis played and operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book entries Tho system is ready ta receive business cards Please send from your mobile phone The phone book entries in your cellular phone are transferred to the navigation system To cancel the transfer touch Cancel O Only the names and telephone numbers can be transferred O The transferred data can be edited on the navigation system gt Editing the entry in Phone Book gt Page 90 Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites You can register up to five entries into Dial Favor ites from the phone book Registering the phone numbers that you frequently use in Dial Favor ites will ease the dialing operation The entries registered in Dial Favorites can be operated from the shortcut menu You can also operate them with Voice Recognition to make a call 1 Touch Information in the Navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu Touch Dial Favorites 3 Touch Set o
269. perable Address Search ay Inactive touch key The function is not available e g operation is prohibited while driving Basic Navigation IAWN g A CAUTION 3 Select the method of searching for your 4 Enter the information about your desti e For safety reasons you cannot use some of these basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake see page 20 for details Basic flow of operation 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake 2 Press the MENU button to display the navigation menu Q gt ty xo e is N destination nation to calculate route uoljeiadg oiseg 5 Confirm the location on the map 6 Check and decide the route 7 Your navigation system sets the route to your destination and the map of your surroundings appears 8 After releasing the parking brake drive in accordance with the navigation infor mation subject to the important safety instructions noted on pages 19 and 21 27 mg Calculating your destination by gt a z N v 2 Oo Basic Operation using Address Search The most frequently used function is Address Search in which the address is specified and the destination is searched This section describes how to use Address Search an
270. pictures are already stored in the hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG for mat pictures such as a picture from your digital camera by using a CD R RW You can use pic tures by burning them onto a CD R RW with your PC and inserting it into the navigation sys tem 65 IAWN 2 gt w xo oO suol e007 Buljyipy pue Bunajsibay NAVI i Chapter 6 Registering and Editing Locations Here a method for changing the picture is described with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the navigation sys tem 1 Check that no disc is inserted and insert your CD R RW to the disc loading slot 2 Touch Picture and then touch Import from Disc The list of the pictures stored in the CD R RW is displayed O Touching an option other than Import from Disc allows you to select an image stored on the hard disk drive 3 Toucha picture you want to set O To cancel displaying the picture select No Picture 4 Touch Yes On this screen you can select the following items No Select when you want to change to another picture Return to Step 3 Selecting sound 1 Touch Sound 2 Select the desired sound O To turn off the sound select No Sound 3 Touch Sound to hear the sound 4 Touch Set No sounds can be output during gg Changing the position of locations 1 Touch Modify Location The map of the selected area and its sur roundings a
271. play is automatically canceled O If the built in DVD drive does not operate prop 6 Play tracks in a random order erly an error message may be displayed Touching gag turns the random play on or off gt Built in DVD drive Page 196 7 Scan tracks of a CD Touching turns the scan play on or off Touch key operation Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD When you find the desired Touch keys rack touch o turn scan play off o o O After scanning of a CD is finished normal playback of the tracks will begin again rec 01 Drive it sye to eye rec 03 Integration rec w04 PREMIER rec 05 Brilliance 1 Zaal 6 O 1 Select a desired track from the list Touch a desired track to play 2 Playback and Pause Touching I switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip the track forward or back ward Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next track Touching a lt once skips to the start of the cur rent track Touching again will skip to the previ ous track Touch and hold Fast rewind or forward Keep touching ke or gt gt to perform fast rewind or forward olpey pue aana GA U 1Ng 221nos AY 24 Buisn WAN T Koh 11 be 107 mg Operating the CD ROM MP3 disc Sa heh a ai lt q Ld v 2 g oO Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio You can play an MP3 disc
272. ppears 66 2 Touch the screen to change its position then touch OK Deleting the entry in Address Book Items registered in the Address Book can be deleted All entries of the data in the Address Book can be deleted at once 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book 2 Touch Delete Delete from Address Book screen appears 3 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion 0 Delete from Address Book COHASSET ST OFFICE BURBANK GLENDALE PASADE BURBANK GLENDALE PASADE LEMP AVE N ROSE ST t k m m m me l On this screen you can select the following items AII Selects all entries None Displayed when all locations are selected Cancels all selected locations 4 Touch Delete 5 Select Yes The data you selected is deleted Alternative option No Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4 O Because deleted data cannot be restored take extra care not to delete by mistake Destination History Operations The points to which a route has been calculated in the past are automatically saved in Destina tion History O If no location is stored in Destination History you cannot select Destination History If you perform a route calculation you can select Destination History 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Destination History
273. quencies with the touch of a key 1 Touch and hold BSM BSM starts The six strongest broadcast frequen cies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 P6 in order of their signal strength O To cancel the storage process touch Can cel O Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 P6 Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch Local 2 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on O To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to set the sensitivity There are two levels of sensitivity for AM Level 1 2 The level 2 setting allows reception of only he strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations 116 Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Library You can record tracks from a music CD to the hard disk in the navigation system The music library function enables you to record music CDs on the hard disk in the navigation system and play them back with various methods To use the music library start by recording sound sources from the CD Music Library Recording When you play back a music CD that is not recorded on the navigation system the system automatically begins recording that CD to the music library This section describes cautions and recording p
274. r of possible choices H Touching f or b on the scroll bar scrolls hrough the list and allows you to view the remaining items 3 a f all of the characters cannot be displayed within the displayed area touching to the ight of the item allows you to see remaining characters 4 Touching Pe displays a map of the place you have selected Possibilities for place names may appear with the list screen You can also set a destination by touching Pe to the right of the list Touch OK to set the location indi cated by the scroll cursor as your destination 5 Back Returns previous screen Checking the location on the map Location confirmation screen a Jos 2 8 EA ex OYSON LN 14 1 Calculating the route to the destination Route calculation starts When the route cal culation is completed Route confirmation screen appears O If you press the MAP button or MENU button during route calculation the calcu lation is canceled and the map screen appears 2 Scrolling the map The map display changes to the scroll mode You can fine tune the location in the scroll mode and then you can set the location as your destination or do various operations by using the shortcut menu D Shortcut menu gt Page 45 3 Setting the location as a waypoint The location indicated by the scroll cursor will be set as a waypoint D
275. re than ing for only a short time your vehicle s actual two GPS satellites GPS positioning does not position and the current location mark on the take place map may diverge considerably Once GPS e In some driving conditions signals from GPS eception is restored accuracy will be recov satellites may not reach your vehicle In this ered case it is impossible for the system to use GPS positioning a Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse Data O The speed pulse data comes from the speed sensing circuit The location of this speed sensing circuit depends on your vehicle model In some cases it is impossible to make a connection to it and in such a case we recommend that the ND PG1 speed pulse generator sold separately be used gt 5 5 3 2 X Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning Errors For various reasons such as the state of the road you are traveling on and the state of reception of the GPS signal the actual position of your vehicle may differ from the position displayed on the map screen e Ifyou make a shallow turn When driving through a dense forest or tall trees 185 mmm there is a parallel road e If there is a loop or similar road configuration z A z e If you take a ferry e If there is another road very nearby such as in the case of an elevated freeway e If you are driving on along straight road or a gently curving road e If you take a recently opened road that
276. reconnects the specified cellular phone except when the connection is cut by the cellular phone opera ion You can open Phone Menu directly by pressing and holding the MENU button Phone Menu bd Dial IPhone Book Dial Read Dialed E Bes Re Card l 1l Received Phone Calls Ree l la Back O You can check the signal strength for connec ion between your cellular phone and Blue ooth unit sold separately with Connection Status in Hardware Menu gt Connection Status gt Page 97 O You can set the voice volume and ring volume with Volume in Settings Menu gt Volume gt Page 95 O You can set to mute peripheral sounds during hands free phoning gt Mute Set gt Page 157 While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is connected is dis played on the map 83 IAWN O pey ES xo Daa is o Buluoygd 3aij spuepy Buisp wu I Of you operate using the CD SR1 Steering gt q z Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning Remote Control sold separately the follow ing buttons can be used for operation VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button Same function as on the screen Except for Received Calls and Emer gency Info VR CANCEL ON HOOK button Same function as or J on the screen PHONE MENU button Open Phone Menu directly Setting up for hands free phon ing Before you can use the hands free phoning func i
277. rent route including traffic flow information is displayed onscreen in a list 1 70 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Traffic On Route The currently set traffic information on the route appears on screen O The method for checking the content dis played on the screen is the same for Checking traffic information Checking traffic flow information on the list The traffic flow information can also be displayed as an onscreen list 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Traffic Flow The list with the traffic flow information is shown EZE mph You can sort the traffic information by the average speed The other methods for checking the traffic flow information displayed on screen is the same for Checking traffic information Confirming traffic information on the map O Aline displayed only when the map scale is 2 5 mile 5 km or lower g Icon appears only when the scale on the map is 10 mile 20 km or lower If the scale is changed the icons are resized accord ing to the selected scale Traffic event icon and line The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows Traffic event icon with yellow line Stop and go traffic with red line Stopped traffic with black line Closed blocked roads etc For the meaning of the icon see Traffic Set tings in the Information menu D Selecting traffic i
278. requency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned 5 Preset list display Shows the preset list 6 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on 7 STEREO indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo 113 olpey pue aana GA U 1Ng 221nos AY 24 Buisn WAA 1 dey EE Touch key operation gt lt Chapter 11 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio 1 Touch the source icon and then touch FM to select the radio FM When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys Seok enamn 2 4 Mra 5 3 1 Touch Recall the preset station Touch and hold Store the broadcast station You can register the frequency currently being eceived to the preset list You can easily store up o six broadcast frequencies for later recall with he touch of a key O Touch to recall the preset frequency O Upto 18 stations 6 for each of three FM bands can be stored in memory 2 Touch Perform manual tuning To perform manual tuning touch EE or briefly The frequencies move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning keep touching kiemas or or about one second and release The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is found O You can cancel seek tuning by touchi
279. rewind or forward 4 Stop playback When you stop playback by touching W that track number on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that track when you play the disc again O To play the disc again touch gt II 5 Select upper folder Touch to move to the upper folder and play back the first track on that folder If the folder contain no MP3 files the contents of that folder are shown O Ifthe current folder is the ROOT folder can not be used 6 Switch mode between MP3 and music CD CD DA When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and MIXED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD DA Touching Media switches between CD DA part and MP3 part 7 Display text information on MP3 disc Text information recorded on an MP3 disc can be displayed The next piece of information is displayed e Disc Title disc title e Track Title track title Folder Title folder name e File Name file name Artist Name artist name e Genre genre e Release Year release year O The information marked with an asterisk is displayed only when an ID3 tag has been encoded on MP3 files on the disc If specific information of the ID3 tag has not been encoded on MP3 files on disc the corre sponding item may be blank 8 Repeat play Each touch of geal changes the settings as fol lows e Track Repeat Repeat just t
280. rk your vehicle in the safe place and apply the parking brake D Parking brake interlock Page 20 Search error The title number chapter number time or 10 key command that you enter in 10Key Search do not exist This mes sage will appear when the DVD drive cannot accept that command Enter the available numbers or 10 key command or use another search method 196 Hard disk drive Music Library Message This CD cannot be recorded When lf you insert a CD which prohibits sec ond generation copies or duplicate What to do Use another CD and retry AW IAWN i e Recording error Switching to CD playback mode e Recording error Recording is stopped e The recording was unsta ble Restart the recording from the beginning of the track lf recording can not be carried out due to continuous skipping on certain part of the disc because the disc is dirty scratched or otherwise damaged the pick up lens of the DVD drive is dirty or extreme vibration occurs continuously e Clean the disc and retry e Clean the pick up lens with a commer cially available cleaning kit for DVD then retry e Retry in vibration free condition Exceeded playlist maxi mum No more playlists can be recorded If you try to record a new CD but the maximum number of playlists are already recorded The album playlist can be stores up to 400 Delete some playlists and retry Playback error Mu
281. rning off the ignition switch will cause the antenna to automatically retract or turn off Setting the clock display on the video image You can select whether to display the clock on the video image screen without touch keys such as DVD Video AV INPUT or TV tuner 1 Touch Clock DISP in the System Set tings menu Touching Clock DISP switches between All SCRN and Audio SCRN All SCRN The clock is overlaid on the Video image 158 e Audio SCRN The clock is not overlaid on the Video image Setting the CD recording mode You can set whether to start recording tracks automatically when you play a CD or to manually trigger recording 1 Touch REC Mode in the System Set tings menu Each touch of REC Mode changes the set tings as follows e Auto Records the tracks automatically when a CD is played e Manual Lets you select the tracks you want to record manually and records them e Single Automatically records only the first track of the CD Setting the rear output and sub woofer controller The navigation system s rear output can be used for full range speaker or subwoofer connection If you switch the Rear SP setting to Sub w you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub woofer without using an auxiliary amp Initially the navigation system is set for rear full range speaker connection When rear output is connected to full range speakers when Rear SP
282. roads using and 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Average Speed 3 Touch or to set the speed a ere eee Average Speed Minor Ordinary Road Major Ordinary Road Freeway O The estimated time of arrival is not neces sarily estimated based on this speed value Checking the Setting Related with Hardware The hardware status including the driving status of avehicle positioning status by satellite learn ing status of the 3D sensor and cable connection status can be checked Checking the connections of leads and installation positions Check that leads are properly connected between the navigation system and the vehicle Please also check whether they are connected in the correct positions 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Connection Status The Connection Status screen appears Speed Pulse GPS Antenna Phone Connection Status Installation Position Parking Brake Power Voltage Nlunanatat Back Signal Foam oma en ean o NDUR N Ne NS Nd ar Snn 1 Speed Pulse The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga tion system is shown 0 is shown while the vehicle is stationary 2 GPS Antenna Indicates the connection status of the GPS antenna the reception sensitivity and from how many satellites the signal is received If the signal is received correctly OK is dis played
283. rocedure O The music library can record up to 200 general music CDs worth of music data This is just an average number and varies depending on the size of music data contained in the CDs Screen configuration 4 ie sid 6 1 Recording mode indicator Shows the current recording mode D Setting the CD recording mode gt Page 158 2 Recording progress indicator Shows the progress of the recording Fractions show number of recorded tracks total number of racks in the CD 100 appears to indicate that the recording has completed You can touch Stop to switch the screen and perform another opera tion 3 Recording indicator Shows the recording status Red indicates that recording is in progress Blue indicates preparing recording 4 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 5 Track indicator Shows the number and title of the track currently playing 6 Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist currently playing 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track 8 Track list Shows tracks in the CD 9 Record status of tracks H Recorded track EJ Red Track being recorded Blue Track is not recorded yet O Track selection operation or special playback functions such as random play are disabled until recording finishes To
284. roll mode from search result screen gt Basic Operation gt Set As Destina tion gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen gt Basic Operation gt Set As Way Map Operation gt Change Scale XXXX mile s Scale lt 0 02miles 0 05miles 0 1 miles 0 25miles 0 5miles 0 75miles 1mile 2 4miles Smiles 10miles 25miles 50miles 100miles 250miles 500miles 1000miles gt gt Map screen will be changed to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is mile e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode Map Operation gt Change Scale XXXX mile yards Scale lt 25yards 50yards 100yards 0 25miles 0 5miles 0 75miles 1mile 2 4miles Smiles 10miles 25miles 50miles 100miles 250miles 500miles 1000miles gt gt Map screen will be changed to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is Mile amp Yard e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode Map Operation gt Change Scale gt Zoom Out Zoom In gt Map screen will zoom out or zoom in Operating the view mode Guide View Rear View Vehicle Dynamics gt Map screen will be changed to selected view mode Operating the map orientation Map Operation gt Heading Up North Up gt
285. roying the Software The Agreement also will terminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement Upon su agree to destroy ch termination you he Software 6 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agree ent This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of he Province of Ontario and the federal laws of Canada applicable therein If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable he remaining provisions of this Agreement shall emain in full force and effect Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT THE AGREE MENT BETWEEN YOU THE END USER AND TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA INC Tele Atlas BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE ATLAS DATA YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 Grant of License Tele Atlas grants you a non transferable non exclusive license to use the map data and busi ness points of interest information the POls together the Data contained on these discs solely for personal non commercial use and not o operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data of other persons or entities You may
286. s gt Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual gt Page 149 olpey pue aana GA U 1Ng aaun0g AY 34 Buisn AT T Koh 1 be 105 mg Operating a Music CD gt lt em Ba v 2 i oO Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio You can play anormal music CD using the built in DVD drive of the navigation unit This section describes that operations Selecting CD as the source 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert a disc you want to play to disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start O If the disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch CD gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 O When being read in Checking disc is dis played About auto hard disk recording The Navigation system can record the tracks from a music CD into the hard disk drive In default setting the system starts recording automatically when an unrecorded music CD is inserted If you want to cancel the recording touch Stop Stop i ve 1S te sound vision soul B P 01 Drive it PIDNEER TIME 00 39 CEEL T 02 Eyo to eyo TT 08 tntegr ation D4 PREMER w D5 Brilliance Setting the CD recording mode Page 158 Music Library Recording gt Page 117 Music Library Play Page 119 Q 0 90 80 Also see at Handling and Care of the Disc in the Hardware Manual and D
287. s when you may see error messages other than those shown here In such a case follow the instructions given on the display Message Irregular speed pulse signal detected Please power off the sys tem and check the installation Then please re boot the system and press OK When lf the navigation system does not receive the vehicle speed pulse What to do Consult your Pioneer dealer Speed pulse not connected Calibra tion will start without speed pulse Accuracy is not fully ensured without speed pulse The speed signal input pink lead wire of the power cable is not con nected To operate with 3D hybrid mode con nect the speed signal input pink ead wire of the power cable cor rectly Although it can be operated in Sim ple hybrid mode without connecting he speed signal input the precision of the positioning will be less accu rate Vibration detected Please power off the system and check the installa tion Then please re boot the system and press OK The navigation unit is installed in a place where it may be affected by a large vibration Re install the navigation unit in a place where the unit will not be affected by vibration Direction of G sensor is not correct Please power off the system and check the installation Then please re boot the system and press OK Direction of G sensor is set incor rectly See the Installation Manual and set he directio
288. select tracks or perform special playback functions touch Stop to stop recording Title display Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com O Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Data base on the built in hard disk drive If you insert a CD TEXT disc the system priori tized a title information encoded in CD TEXT disc O When multiple options for the title information are found or no title information exists is displayed A title may be displayed if you update the title information manually after recording has finished 117 Cc n E Q gt gt lt n e c 5 6 a E o a E o 5 5 lt wil Q Chapter 12 Using the AV Source Music Library Assigning another candidate for title infor mation gt Page 128 O If no title information exists in the Gracenote Database on the built in hard disk drive the date when the track was recorded is entered automatically If you want to display the title information enter the title manually after ecording has finished gt Editing a playlist or tracks gt Page 123 ack screen and the recording screen is syn onized with the one edited in the music ary If you edit the tit
289. sement Park Fair Ground Beach National Park amp Forest Camping amp Hiking Ski Resort Bowling Golf Course Gym Pool amp Tennis Travel Agency Tourist Information Tourist Attraction Park amp Rec reation Category name Public Service amp Facility Police Station Government Office Post Office Court House Convention Center City Center Library Category name Transportation Airline Access Airport Ferry Terminal Train Station Rest Area Category name Medical Doctor Dentist Veterinarian Emergency Medical Service Hospital Pharmacy Category name School University amp College Nursery School Elementary School Junior High School High School Vocational School 177 AW IAWN i d1IOA Y IM Wa SAg UO EHIAeN ANO Huljesado L4 1 dey i AV AAWN Li daydeyg 910 A YIM W9 Shg UO eHIAeN INO Burzeiado 178 Appendix Returning the Navigation Sys tem to the Default or Factory Settings You can return settings or recorded contents to the default or factory settings There are four methods to clear user data and the situations and the cleared contents are different for each method For the contents that are cleared in each method see the list presented later o The map data and the system data are not cleared from the hard disk drive by any clear ing method Method 1 RESET button Pressing the RESET button clears almost all set tings of the audio function
290. setting is Full you can connect the RCA sub woofer output SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or NON FADING OUTPUT to a subwoofer In this case you can select whether to use the subwoofer con troller s low pass filter phase built in amp of the navigation system or the auxiliary amp or sub woofer O If you change the subwoofer controller Rear SP or Preout Sub Woofer or Non Fad ing in the Audio Settings menu return to he factory settings O Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting O Rear SP can be set only when the source is OFF 1 Touch Rear SP in the System Settings menu 2 Touch Full or Sub w to switch the rear output setting O When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output select Full When a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker leads directly select Sub w Touch Preout to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output g g D D When the Rear SP Preout is invalid setting is Sub w Even if you change this setting there is no output unless you tu Sub Woofer in the menu On Using non fading ou n Non Fading or Audio Settings tput gt Page 152 Using subwoofer ou put gt Page 152 Switching the 5 1ch setting When the navigation system is combined with he multi channel processor system sold sepa ately you can use the multi channel sound Enter the foll
291. settings as follows e MIRROR The video on the front screen of the navigation unit is output to the Rear display DVD The video and sound of the DVDs are output to the Rear display e AV The video and sound of the AV INPUT are output to the Rear display O When MIRROR is selected the following restrictions are applied to Rear display When the TV tuner is connected with AV BUS its Video image cannot be output Connect the TV tuner s rear output to Rear display directly When selecting Rear View in the map display nothing is displayed All sounds cannot be output for Rear dis play There is no picture on Rear display while Picture Adjust for Back Cameral is car ried out 159 1ensiA olpny YIM payejas Bulyjag olpny ay Bulziwoysng Q gt Y xo r oO eo The map screen navigation images output O Touching Source while adjusting the gt to the Rear display differ from standard rear view camera image returns you to the q NTSC format images Therefore their quality previous screen will be inferior to the images that appear on O The adjustments of Brightness Contrast the front screen and Dimmer are stored separately when O When DVD is selected the following your vehicle s headlights are off daytime restrictions are applied to Rear display and when your vehicle s he
292. sic Library cannot be played The music library component is abnor mal Consult your deale s This playlist cannot store more than 99 tracks If you try to add tracks but the My Mix or My Favorite playlists are maximum num ber The My Mix and My Favorite playl ists can store the tracks up to 99 Delete some tracks and retry This track cannot be added to MyMix The music library component is abnor mal Consult your deale s Name cannot be used for voice recognition Try again Some invalid characters have been entered and the system cannot convert it to the appropriate pronunciation Enter different characters so that the sys tem can pronounce it Single recording mode will only record the first track of CD Recording tracks other than the first rack of CD when the recording mode is Single When you set Single in REC Mode the system only can record the first track of CD Set Auto or Manual in REC Mode and retry gt Page 158 HDD is full This CD cannot be recorded There is no free space for recording in he hard disk drive gt 5 5 Ss 2 X Delete some tracks or playlists and try again if you want to record that CD Unable to select appropriate Track info due to multiple entries in the database Some corresponding data is found in he Gracenote Database but the sys em cannot select one to append a title Enter the title m
293. snq e2unog Ay ey Buisn AMES eal fe gm Searching the playlist by artist gt lt N v Q lt oO Using the AV Source Music Library Select a playlist formed by an artist and play it back 1 Touch Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Artists Artist playlist appears 3 Touch the artist name Artist playlist you want to play back OT Sound vision soul Ot Drive it PIONEER TIME 03 05 PQ search x wn E pAn 5 a02 PIONEER TIME t44 03 Untung hara 1 i04 Zeta 2 ra wor AY Settings The first track in the selected playlist is played back Search a playlist by genre Select a playlist formed by a genre and play it back O Only the genre of a recorded track is displayed in a genre playlist 1 Touch Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Genres Genre playlist appears 3 Touch the genre Genre playlist you want to play back p 1038 mm 01 sound vision soul D 01 Drivoit PIONEER TIME 03 19 Bou Reek Pep PQ search en ME S02 Hp Hop Ran Fi 03 Otters The first track in the selected playlist is played back 122 Creating a playlist with a cus tomized order You can register your favorite tracks as a playlist and play them back in desired order My Favorites group has two types of playlists ne 1999 ame DI sound vesion soul D h Ot Drive
294. song playing in the selected list 3 Repeat play indicator Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current song or all songs on current list 4 Shuffle play indicator Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs of albums 5 Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the song 6 Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist of the current song 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current song 8 Song title indicator Shows the title of the current song 9 Playing Song Information Shows the information and status of the current song 10 Song title Artist name and Album title indicator When playing a song Song title Artist name and Album title are displayed Touch key operation 1 Touch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch keys 2 4 3 SENESI Hits CD One 001 Koop Ya Head Greatost Hits CO One Keep Ya Head 1 Playback and Pause Touching I switches between playback and pause 2 Touch Skip back or forward to another song Touching gt gt I skips to the start of the next song Touching ka once skips to the start of the cur ent song Touching again will skip to the previ ous song Touch and hold fast forward or rewind O You can
295. splayed is a guideline and may Edit Insurance Phone 1 111 222 3333 not correspond to the actual speed Edit TOW Service Phone 1 868 228 9882 K 1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display D Changing the map display mode gt Page 39 O If information is already registered that information will appear 4 Input the number you wish to register 2 Touch the left or right meter then touch OK Touch keys are displayed Completes the registration 3 Touch the items you want to display Voltage Acceleration Side Accetoration Angular Velocity Direction TO Peak Mold Reset Adjust Look co lEdit VINI PAON ae You can select the following items 2 Register your Vehicle s Identification Number Voltage ok cas E You can enter between 1 and 17 digits Displays the power supply and voltage sup oO Edit Policy Number plied from the battery to this system Register your insurance policy number Acceleration Acceleration in a forward direction is dis played The sign indicates acceleration while the sign indicates deceleration Side Acceleration Acceleration in a side direction such as when urning is displayed The sign indicates a right turn while the sign indicates a left urn Edit Insurance Phone Angular Velocity Register your insurance company s phone Displays the vehicle s turning angle over one number second how far it has turned in a seco
296. ss Book Icon gt Page 48 5 Picture As you approach the location the registered image appears You can register the picture stored in the navi gation system You can also import and regis ter a picture shot from a digital camera by using a CD ROM 6 Sound The selected sound is played when you approach the location 7 Modify Location You can change the registered location by scrolling the map 8 Only when the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected to the navigation system and a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is also connected you can make a phone call to the registered phone number 3 by touch ing aa gt Dialing the entry in the Address Book gt Page 88 cannot use that item as a voice command eeeeeeeede2e0ee2e020202028000800808080 When you approach a registered location while traveling When a location with a registered sound effect and image comes within an approx 0 19 miles 300 m radius from the vehicle position the sound effect plays and the image appears Changing a name 1 Touch Name then touch Yes The message confirming whether or not to register the entered name as voice command is displayed When not registering a name as a voice com mand select No 2 Enter anew name then touch OK The current name appears in the text box Delete the current name and enter a new name between 1 and 23 characters long O Touch Small to ent
297. ssing the P LIST 4 but on O In Category Mode the screen displays cate gory search Touch and hold Storing broadcast stations You can register the channel currently being broadcast to the preset list O Upto 18 stations 6 for each of three SIRIUS bands can be stored in memory 2 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at atime Ifyou keep touching ga or MaRS you can skip broadcasting channels g You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 3 Switch the SIRIUS display Each touch of DISP changes the display infor ation Channel number Channel name Channel category Artist name feature Song program itle Composer O Touch and hold to switch ON OFF the infor mation scroll 4 Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two meth ods for selecting and listing the channel All Ch Mode You can select a channel from all channels when you operate Category Mode You can select a channel within selected cate gory when you operate 5 Select a SIRIUS band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS band is displayed SIRIUS 1 SIRIUS 2 or SIR IUS 3 This is useful for switching the preset 6 Switch the touch keys to next page 7 Select team for game alert You can register your favorite team gt Selecting teams for Game Alert gt Page 135 gt Swi
298. stem may not be able to list all roads In this case the remaining roads will be shown in the list as you drive on 35 mag Checking the entire route over gt q z OET Basic Operation view on the map You can check the entire shape of the current route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview Route confirmation screen appears O Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Detail Profitc a Lake aon Wz ka Detail Waypoints 3 Touch the screen and place the scroll cur sor on the point where you want to view the detail or the entire picture Or zoom in or zoom out the map scale F MENDOCINO Y Ej F E aki ee E UNEA CT i gt The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in or out so you can view the detail or the entire picture 4 Touch Back The screen returns to the previous display O You can also check the overview by using the shortcut menu if Whole Route Over view is selected on the Short Cut Selection 36 Editing Waypoints You can select waypoints locations you want to visit on the way to your destination and you can recalculate the route to pass through these loca tions Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be selected and selected points can be sorted automatically or manually 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview
299. story Calls made or editing performed only on your cellular phone will not be reflected to the dialed number history o navigation system You cannot make a call r phone book in the to the entry of an unknown user no phone number in the received call history lf calls are made by ope rating your cellular phone no history data will be recorded in the navigation system About phone book transfer e With some cellular pho sible to transfer all item one time In this case t ime from your cellular Depending on the cellu nected to this navigatio a o echnology this navig play the phone book c ers may be garbled o ransferred from the ce es it may not be pos s in the phone book at ransfer items one at a phone ar phone that is con n system via Bluetooth ion system cannot dis rectly Some charac irst name and last name is put in reverse order f the phone book in the cellular phone con ains image data the phone book may not be ransferred correctly Image data cannot be lular phone Depending on the cellu lar phone phone book ransfer may not be available 93 IAWN g Q gt iY xo p o Buluoyd 3aij spueyH Bulsp i IAWN 6 jaydeyg BHuluoyd 291j spuey Busy 94 Chapter 10 mz 5 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Guidance A CAUTION This setting controls the guidance volume of e For
300. sword EEE K Touch Mobile The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth wireless technology connection Operate your cellular phone to register the navigation system If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass word enter the password of the navigation system After the registration is completed the follow ing screen appears Connection established successfully IMy mobile phone 00126282F7FB O If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning Connecting a registered cellular phone EEEN The navigation system automatically connects the cellular phone selected as a target of connec tion However connect the cellular phone manu ally in the following cases Two or more cellular phones are registered and you want to manually select the cellula phone to be used You want to reconnect a disconnected cellular phone Connection cannot be established automati cally for some reason Unregistered cellular phones cannot be con nected Activate the Bluetooth wireless technology on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction anual of your cellular phone Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears Phone name currently connected or selected as a target of connection Pho
301. t rack 7 Folder and track list Shows contents of the folde emporarily displayed 8 Bit rate Shows the bit rate of the file currently playing currently playing or Touch key operation Touch keys 3 6 5 ELECO 02 Bood PO Evac 04 Light Of Nerth 1 7 8 9 1 Select tracks from the list or viewing con tents of the folders The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on a disc If you touch a folder on the list you can view its contents If you touch a track on he list you can play the selected track O Touching H or M switches to the next or previ ous page in the list g If the selected folder does not contain any track that can be played the track list is not displayed 2 Playback and Pause Touching I switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip forward or backward Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next track Touching a once skips to the start of the cur rent track Touching again will skip to the previ ous track Touch and hold Fast rewind or forward Keep touching kea or gt gt to perform fast rewind or forward g You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button O Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the beginning of the first track on the disc g In the case of MP3 there is no sound on fast
302. t 55 Finding a POI in the Vicinity 55 Searching for the facilities around the current position 55 Searching for the facilities around the scroll cursor 56 13 Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the Telephone Number 57 Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to Your Favorite Location 57 Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo ry and Address Book 58 Registering deleting POI Shortcuts 58 Registering a POI shortcut 58 Deleting a POI shortcut 59 Chapter 6 Registering and Editing Locations Registering Locations Overview 61 Registering Your Home and Your Favorite Location 61 Registering a Location into Address Book 62 Registering a location by scroll mode 62 Registering a location by Address Book 62 Viewing the Address Book 63 Editing the entry in Address Book 63 Deleting the entry in Address Book 66 Destination History Operations 67 Deleting the entry in Destination History 67 Chapter 7 Using Traffic Information Using XM NavTraffic Information 69 Viewing traffic list 69 Confirming traffic information on the map 70 Setting alternative route to avoid traffic congestion 71 Selecting traffic information to display 72 Chapter 8 Using XM Tuner and Other Informa tion Using the XM Tuner to View Stock Sports and Other Information 75 Displaying stock prices 75 Storing browsable information 76 Displaying favorite browsable Information 76
303. t position uoljeunojuy orea Buisn the traffic information in alpha 69 NAVI Chapter 7 Using Traffic Information For the list displayed when you touch Traffic Events the list will be sorted according to he linear distance from the vehicle position to he traffic information For the list displayed when you touch Traffic On Route the list will be sorted according to he distance from the vehicle position to the raffic information You can sort the traffic information according o the incident The list will be sorted in the order of closed blocked roads traffic congestion accidents oad works and others When new traffic information is received cur ent information is changed or old informa ion has been removed the list is updated to eflect the new situation 7 Touching allows you to check the location on a map Traffic information without posi ional information cannot be checked on a map Select an incident you want to view in detail The details of the selected incident are dis played O Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident If the information cannot be displayed on one screen touch M or R to view the remaining information Touch Back to return to the list with traffic information A list with traffic information appears again Checking traffic information on the route All traffic information on the cur
304. t to display 4 Touch Select Detail Overlay PO Select Ail Deselect All g Select Detail i Sk a Back Select All Selects all detailed categories that are included in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Deselect All Deselects the selected category Touch the desired detailed category O You can select up to 100 items from the detailed category Public Service a Facility ME Police station a Government Office MB Post Office fv court House Mt Convention Center v4 ME City center Categories that are already set will have a red check mark 6 Touch OK Returns previous screen 7 To finish the selection touch OK D Viewing the information of a specified location gt Page 45 50 Viewing the Map Color Legend You can browse the type of the roads and areas displayed on the map 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Map Legend 2 Touch the type which you want to see Map Legend City Map Areas Mian Areas City Map Lines Roads and Boundaries Navigation Lines 3 Touch R or M to switch to the next page or previous page serene Map Areas Day Ma E senor fea hospital and other sites BE city acca On this screen you can operate the following items Day You can check the color of the Day screen Night You can check the color of the Night screen To ret
305. tching the Game Alert on or off gt Page 135 8 Display game information You can display game information and changes to the broadcast channel gt Displaying game information Game Info gt Page 136 9 Memorize the current song The song title and artist name being broadcast will be memorized in My Mix When the song that matches the song information memorized in My Mix is broadcast you can tune the channel to the one that is broadcasting that song gt Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song gt Page 136 10 Set the notification of the memorized songs You can set the alert for the songs memorized in My Mix You can also delete the memorized song gt Setting the alert for each memorized song Page 137 D Deleting the memorized songs gt Page 137 11 Select a SIRIUS channel directly The Channel number input screen appears You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number While the input number is displayed touch Enter and then touch Back O To cancel the input numbers touch Clear 12 Switch the touch keys to previous page 13 Switch the channel category Touch Up or Down to select the desired cate gory Selecting teams for Game Alert This navigation system can alert you when games involving your favorite teams are about to start To use this function you need to set the game
306. te or province but in Vicinity the list to pror ed to the next step Search the distance for the search is limited O When the options are narrowed down to to within a 16 km 10 mile radius six or less a list of the matching facilities automatically appears The following three methods are available for eee aoe When you enter the same characters that searching facilities by POI were entered previously the system auto Searching tor POIs by specifying a category matically displays the character string that mi TE r follows the entered characters Auto fill in e Searching for POIs by specifying a city name first function D Auto fill in function Page 29 53 NAVI uw v Q oO Setting a Route to Your Destination O If less than six POIs in a detailed category are available the screen for inputting the POI name is skipped Please proceed to Step 4 4 Touch pare Touching sorts the items in the list in the order of distance ayy CALIFORNIA 3 MS vevvorano swo zag mis By taa FE eL orano smoa f e zag mi EI Ba viet TE ieLnorano swoop omi EI B Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical order O You can use this sort function only when there are 2 000 or less candidates 5 Touch the desired POI for your destina tion cA CALIFORNIA 3 ME vevoorano sMoe ey 1z0 mio By ipar be E LEL DORADO SMOG zag imi R B viet TE ien norano soa 208
307. te the tracking Other Operation gt Emergency Information gt Displaying Turning on or off the Overlay POI the Emergency info screen Other Operation Display Overlay POI gt Displaying the Other Operation Hide Overlay POI gt Turn off Overlay POI selected POI in Overlay POI Voice commands related to hands free phoning The following verbal commands can be used both i n navigation screen and audio operation screen Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology Call Telephone Book gt lt Registered phone book s pron telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the en unciation gt gt If the registered entry in phone book has ry Call gt Call Registered Point gt lt Registered location s pronunciation gt gt If the registered location has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the registered location Call gt Redial gt Touch VOICE icon to redial Call Call Phone Number gt Say the number you want Call Received Call gt Displaying the received call list Call gt Call Favorite 1 2 3 4 5 gt Touch VOICE icon to dial Call gt Call Home gt Touch VOICE icon to call your home Only when the phone number is registered in your home Call Call lt Registered location s pronunciation gt gt VOICE icon to call the registered location o call Touch VOICE icon to dial Note 1 the registered location
308. the 4 point adjustment 5 Press the V button The 16 point touch panel adjustment screen appears 6 Gently touch the center of the mark dis played on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen After you touch all marks the adjusted posi ion data is saved O Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data g Press the V button to return to the previ ous adjustment position O To cancel the adjustment press the MAP button 7 Press the MAP button The adjustment is complete If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly consult your local Pio neer dealer Positioning Technology The navigation system accurately measures your current location by combining the positioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning AW IAWN g Positioning by GPS The Global Positioning System GPS uses a net work of satellites orbiting the Earth Each of the satellites which orbit at a height of 68 900 000 feet 21 000 km continually broadcasts radio sig nals giving time and position information This ensures that signals from at least three can be picked up from any open area on the ground s surface The accuracy of the GPS information depends on how good the reception is When the signals are strong and reception is good GPS can determine latitude longitude and altitude for accurate posi tioning in three dimensions But if signal quality is poor only two dimensions latitude and lo
309. the built in hard disk drive the date when the track was recorded is entered automatically If you want to display the title information enter the title manually after recording has finished D Changing the title of the playlist or track gt Page 125 Relationship of groups playlists and tracks The music library is organized as follows with three levels groups playlists and tracks Group Playlist Track 1 Group Playlist Track 2 Group Playlist Track 3 Playlist Track 4 Track 6 There are four types of groups Album group Albums Stores the recorded track data in its original order One playlist is automatically created when a CD is recorded Artist group Artists Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by art ist names Genre group Genres Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by genres My Favorite group My Favorites Stores playlists registered with your favorite selection Maximum number you can register Group Playlist Tracks for a playlist Albums 400 99 Artists 400 400 Genres 13 400 My Favor 5 99 ites 120 lf you try to record one playlist more than the number listed above the oldest playlist will be deleted Touch key operation Listening to a track recorded in the Music Library 1 Touch the source icon and then touch LIBRARY When the source icon is n
310. the characters so that the pronuncia O When you confirm the pronunciation is shown on the left side of the location name displayed in the Address Book menu This mark indicates that this name can be used as a voice command during voice operation g You cannot change the pronunciation of your home O If nothing is entered in the text box you cannot use that item as the voice com mands tion matches your desired pronounciation Entering or changing a phone number 1 Touch Phone 2 Input a phone number then touch OK The Address Information menu appears O To change a registered phone number delete the existing number and then enter anew one Selecting an icon to appear on the map O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map D Address Book Icon Page 48 1 Touch Icon 2 Touch the icon that you want to appear on the map The Address Information menu appears g You cannot change the icon of your home or your favorite location O If you set J dot the registered name of that entry can be displayed on the map The registered name does not appear if Address Book Icon Display is set to Off Customizing the picture Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic tures before creating a CD R RW D Limitations for importing pictures gt Page 101 You can customize a picture for Address book entry Some
311. the following chart say the registered pro nunciation For example if the registered pronunciation in address book is My office and you want o operate Search by entry on the address book say My office You can hear and edit the pronun ciation gt Changing a pronunciation Page 65 O For lt Registered phone book s pronunciation gt shown on the following chart say the registered pro nunciation For example if the registered pronunciation in phone book is My friend and you want o operate Telephone Book say My friend You can hear and edit the pronunciation D Editing the entry in Phone Book gt Page 90 O For lt Album playlist name gt lt Artist playlist name gt lt Track name gt shown on the following chart say the name in the music library if you edited their pronunciation say their pronunciation You can hear and edit the pronunciation D Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name gt Page 125 g For lt Category Name gt and lt Sub Category Name gt in Vicinity Search refer to Category list for vicinity search and say the desired category in that list g You can skip the commands with the mark For example in case search by Point of interest the system can recognize the command even if you say POI without saying Destination 210A Y IM Wa Shg UOl eHIAeN ANO Buizeiado L4 1 dey
312. the language code input display is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch Enter gt Language Code Chart for DVD gt Page 161 O If the selected language is not recorded on he disc the default language specified on he disc is output and displayed O You can also switch the subtitle and audio anguage by touching Subtitle or Audio during playback D Changing the subtitle language during playback Multi subtitle Page 112 D Changing audio language during play back Multi audio gt Page 112 154 Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally impaired However they are only displayed if they are recorded on the DVD You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired 1 Touch DVD V Setup in the System Set tings menu 2 Touch Assist Subtitle Touching Assist Subtitle switches between On and Off Setting angle icon display You can set to display the angle icon 8 on scenes where the angle can be switched 1 Touch DVD V Setup in the System Set tings menu 2 Touch Multi Angle Touching Multi Angle switches between On and Off Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display A wide screen dis play has a width to height ratio TV aspect of 6 9 while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4 3 If you use a regular rear display has a TV aspect of 4 3 you can set the aspect radio suit able for yo
313. tic You can sort the destination and waypoints automatically The system will show the near est waypoint distance in a straight line from the current location as waypoint 1 and sort the other points including your destination in order of distance from the waypoint 1 Manual You can manually sort destination and way points Touch the destination and waypoints on the left side of the screen in the order you want to visit The touched destination and waypoints are displayed on the right side of the screen Touch OK to complete the sort ing and the previous screen appears Sort Waypoints ME MOUNTAN st Ht E WASHINGTON BLVD 4 W WOODBURY RD AWESON AVE E WASHINGTON BLVD c W WOODBURY RD 4 Touch OK The route is calculated again and Route con firmation screen appears D Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 Skipping a waypoint If points are set the next waypoint along the route can be skipped 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Cancel Route 2 Touch Skip A new route to your destination through all remaining waypoints except for the skipped waypoint is calculated Route confirmation screen appears gt Checking and modifying the route gt Page 32 37 5 O e w xo oe N uol e1ad9 oIseg i IAWN z4e1deus er ss aa 38 Chapter 3 uum z How to Read the Map Display How to Use the Map How
314. time difference Learning Route The system learns the travel history of your vehi cle for each road This setting controls whether or not the travel his tory should be taken into account Filton alculate the route with the travel history taken into account Fjot Calculate the route without the travel history taken into account Clear Clear the current travel history Checking the Current Route oo gt You can check information about the route lt between your current location and your destina tion You can select two methods e Checking the passing streets with a list e Checking the entire route overview on the map Checking the passing streets with a list You can check the route details O This function is not available if your vehicle has deviated from the route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview Route confirmation screen appears O Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Profile Q gt ty xo is N EEF OK Options Profite w aan N bar Detail Waypoints uoieaado oIseg 3 Touch p or M to scroll the list Scroll the list as necessary Names of the streets you are driving through Turning direction Driving distance 4 Touch Back You can return to the previous display O When a long distance route is calculated your navigation sy
315. time of the call dialed or received a een er Dialed Numbers Way PARENTS 7 2 Touch Phone Book The phone book screen appears Touch Information in the Navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch a name from the list to make a call If you touch an alphabet tab you can jump to the first page of the contacts whose names To cancel the call after the system starts dial start with that letter ing touch BESE 87 Dialing the entry in the Address Book You can make a call to the entry registered in the MY FRIEND z address book MY FRIEND i erea O You cannot make a call to locations if the MY PARENTS phone number is not registered MY UNCLE 1 Display the Address Book Touch the entry in the list to make a call gt Operation of the Address Book gt Page 63 To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch isa 2 Touch EZE of the entry you want to call The detail screen appears 4 Toend the call touch at the top right of the screen 3 Touch to make a call Name MARGO ST Calling a number in Dial Favorites Pronunciation ite After finding the list in Dial Favorites you want ey Rm to call you can select the number and make the leon Q call Pictwe No Picture Sound No Sound Se I Before using this function you need to set the Mod ty Location phone number from the phone book to Dial 2 Favorites To cancel the call after the syste
316. tion or waypoint appears 4 Street name or city name that your vehi cle is traveling along 5 Compass The red arrow indicates north If the scale is less than 25 mile 50 km touching the map changes the direction that it is displayed in north up heading up When the scale of the map is 42 greater than 25 mile 50 km it is fixed to North up Heading up The map display always shows the vehicle s direction as proceeding toward the top of the screen orth up The map display always has north at the top of the screen 6 Zoom in Zoom out Touch to change the map s scale gt Changing the scale of the map gt Page 44 7 Map scale The scale of the map is indicated by distance 8 VOICE icon Touch to change to the voice recognition mode O This is displayed only when the microphone for voice recognition is connected D The voice operation of the navigation system Chapter 17 9 Traffic status This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner GEX P10XMT sold separately is connected and traffic information is received TREC No problem ANTENNA Improper antenna connection UPDATING Updating encryption code D Checking the Reception Status of the XM Tuner gt Page 77 10 Current time 11 Estimated time of arrival or travel time to your destination The display alternates by pressing it O The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value
317. tion tempo rarily and retry that later Establish that connection tempo rarily and retry it later Could not find any available phone o available phone exist in the sur roundings when the system searches ooth wireless technology for regis ration or the cellular phone featuring Blue gt 5 5 Ss 2 X e Turn the target phone s Bluetooth wireless technology on e Check whether your cellular phone is turned off and whether the dis tance to your cellular phone is too far Bluetooth unit error It is not possible to find any cell phones f the Bluetooth unit sold separately is disconnected from this navigation system or Bluetooth unit carries out another processing when the system search the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology for registration e Check the connection and retry e Establish that connection tempo rarily and retry later Bluetooth unit error The device name could not be set If the Bluetooth unit sold separately is disconnected from this navigation system or the Bluetooth unit carries out another process when you change the device name e Check the connection and retry e Establish that connection tempo rarily and retry later Registration is not available If you try to perform another opera tion immediately after connection failure Wait for a while and retry Reading failed If you transferred the data from
318. to the navigation system This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection and how to operate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation system The following description assumes that the device name of the cellular phone to be con nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set to My mobile phone Preparing communication devices To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology on the navigation system the Bluetooth unit ND BT1 sold separately is required Precautions for using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology By connecting the Bluetooth unit sold sepa ately you can use the functions described in this manual including hands free phoning or phone book transfer To use these func ions the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology that you want to connect must have a supported profile that is the same as the profile for the Bluetooth unit For he supported profile refer to the owner s manual of the Bluetooth unit O Please read Notes for hands free phoning for your reference D Notes for hands free phoning gt Page 92 O When the power of the navigation system urns off the Bluetooth connection is also dis connected When the system restarts the sys em automatically attempts to reconnect the previously connected cellular phone Even when the connection is cut for some reason he system automatically
319. to view the map of the cur rent location Most of the information provided by your naviga tion system can be seen on the map You need to get to know how the information appears on the O This example shows a case where Second Maneuver Arrow is set to View ree Map Mode A h x Displays the standard map Switching the view mode a do o There are six types of map display and two addi tional view modes Eis ia 2 Sa 9 Map Mode Yi PANIA INE i 16 e Guide Mode during route guidance only i lle sorts g m 5 Route View during route guidance only 3 E iii E Driver s View 11 Sey HAAST Pi 7 6 2D Twin Map View io anra 3D Twin Map View e Vehicle Dynamics Rear View Only possible when the Camera Input is set to On Guide Mode Overlays two arrows onto the standard map 8 4 12 2 7 1 Press the MAP button to display a map of Map Mode Q the area around your current position a 10 20 E 2 Press the MAP button again eg lag o a m 9 w 3 Touch the mode name to select the mode T SLAUSON AVE 16 you want to display ii m F i E o dAl A a O ATTN PRR al Bes a 8 4 12 21 7 Route View Displays the name of the
320. ts artists Albums albums e Songs songs e Genres genres se AV Sottngs FE tte The search screen is displayed The icon on the left indicates that the item is a Playlist and the JJ icon indicates that he item is a Song 142 O Ifyou select Songs proceed to step 4 O When you select Artists Albums or Genres you can start a playback of all songs in the selected list To do this keep touching the list title Touch the title of the list that you want to play Repeat this operation until you find the desired song To return to the previous screen touch CESS From the song list touch the song you want to play O To go to the next page of the list touch M O To return to the previous page of the list touch R Operating the TV tuner A CAUTION e For safety reasons visual images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view visual images you must stop ina safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route see page 20 for details You can use the navigation system to control a TV tuner e g GEX P6400TV GEX P5700TV which is sold separately For details concerning operation refer to the TV tuner s operation manual This sec tion provides information on TV operations with the navigation system that differ from those described in the TV tuner s operation manual When you attempt to watch visual images wh
321. u cannot position your vehicleon The quality of signals from the GPS the map or the positioning error is satellites is poor causing reduced large positioning accuracy Such a loss of signal quality may happen for the fol lowing reasons e The GPS antenna is in an unsuit able location Obstacles are blocking signals rom the satellites The position of satellites relative to your vehicle is bad Signals from the GPS satellites ave been modified to reduce accuracy GPS satellites are oper ated by the US Department of Defense and the US government reserves the right to distort posi ioning data for military reasons This may lead to greater position ing errors f a vehicle phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS antenna GPS reception may be lost temporarily Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or vehicle wax because his may block the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals Check the GPS signal reception gt Page 97 and the position of the GPS antenna if necessary or continue driving until reception improves Keep the antenna clear 188 Symptom Cause Signals from the vehicle s speed pulse are not being picked up prop erly Action See Check that the cables are properly connected If necessary consult the dealer that installed the system The navigation system may not be mounted securely in your vehicle Your vehicle is operating in Simple
322. ualizer in the Audio Settings menu Customizing the Audio Setting related Touch Customize The details setting screen appears 150 3 Touch lt or to select the equalizer band to adjust Each time you touch lt or gt selects equalizer bands in the following order Low Mid High 4 Touch lt or to select the desired center frequency Low 40 80 100 160 Hz Mid 200 500 1K 2K Hz High 3 15K 8K 10K 12 5K Hz 5 Touch lt or to adjust the level of the equalizer band Each time you touch lt or gt increases or decreases the level of the equalization band 12dB to 12dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased 6 Touch lt or gt to select the desired Q Touch lt or gt until the desired the curve char acteristics appears in the display Wide2 Wide1 Narrow1 Narrow2 To adjust other bands repeat step 3 to step 6 Setting the simulated sound stage You can select the desired effect from various simulated sound stages such as Music Studio or Dynamic Theater You can also adjust a listener positioning effect Setting a stage that fits your image 1 Touch Staging in the Audio Settings menu 2 Touch desired stage setting Ese Back O The Living Room setting that empha sizes mid range sound hardly has any effect near the maximum volume level O When you set staging to an option other than Off the high p
323. ues research new products and much 4 Receive notices of software upgrades and soft ware updates 23 AW IAWN g Q gt iY xo Daa is waj shg ay Huisn aiojag p AVW AAWN breideua wa sXg au Buisn aiojog 24 Basic Operation Flow from Startup to Termina tion At first please confirm the positions of the follow ing features using the Hardware Manual e MAP button e MENU button AV button OPEN CLOSE button 1 Start the engine to boot up the system After a short pause the navigation splash screen comes on for a few seconds eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeoeaeee 8 When you use the navigation system for the first time the Regional Settings screen appears On the Regional Settings screen you can change the language or time The settings can also be changed afterward gt Customizing the Regional Settings gt Page 95 2 Check the details of the caution message and touch OK You can operate the navigation system by touching keys displayed on the screen The map of your surroundings is displayed If the route is already set the screen changes to route guidance mode D How to read the current position screen gt Page 39 D Setting the time difference gt Page 96 O To protect the LCD screen from damage be sure to touch the touch keys with a fin ger The stylus is supplied for special cali brations Do not use the stylus for normal operations
324. understand the following safety information A WARNING Do not attempt to install or service your navigation system by yourself Installation or servicing of the navigation system by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards When a route is calculated the route and voice guidance for the route is automati cally set Also for day or time traffic regu lations only information about traffic regulations at the time when the route was calculated is shown One way streets and street closures may not be taken into con sideration For example if a street is open during the morning only but you arrive later it would be against the traffic regula tions so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traffic regulations O Read the entire manual before operating this navigation system O The navigation features of your navigation sys em and rear view camera option if pur chased are intended solely as an aid to you in he operation of your vehicle It is not a substi ute for your attentiveness judgment and care when driving Chapter 1 O Do not operate this navigation system or the rear view camera option if purchased if doing so will divert your attention in any way from
325. unlight high temperatures or depending on the stor age conditions in the vehicle Titles and other text information recorded on a CD R CD RW disc may not be displayed by this product in the case of audio data CD DA If you insert a CD RW disc into this product it will take more time to play back than when you insert a conventional CD or CD R disc Read the precautions with CD R CD RW discs before using them MP3 files When naming an MP3 file add the corre sponding filename extension mp3 This navigation system plays back files with the filename extension mp3 as MP3 files To pre vent noise and malfunctions do not use this extension for files other than MP3 files MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard This product allows playback of MP3 files on CD ROM CD R and CD RW discs Recorded discs can be played back if they are compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system tis possible to play back multi session com patible recorded discs MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer The maximum number of characters for the file and folder name is 32 characters including extension mp3 However the navigation sys em uses proportional font Therefore the number of the characters that you can display varies according to the width of each charac er When playing discs with both MP3 files and
326. ur rear display We recommend use this function only when you want to fit it to rear display O When using a regular display select either Letter Box or Panscan Selecting 16 9 may result in an unnatural picture 1 Touch DVD V Setup in the System Set tings menu 2 Touch TV Aspect Each touch of TV Aspect changes the set tings as follows e 16 9 Wide screen picture 16 9 is dis played as it is initial setting e Letter Box The picture is in the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen e Panscan The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen O When playing discs that do not have a pan scan system the disc is played back with Letter Box even if you select the Pan scan setting Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 9 L8 mark Setting the parental lock Some DVD Video discs let you use parental lock to set restrictions so that children cannot watch a violent and adult oriented scenes You can set the parental lock level in steps as desired O When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock code num ber input indications may be displayed In this case playback will begin when the correct code number is input Setting the code number and level When you first use this function register your code number If you do not register a code num ber parental lock will not operate
327. urce according to your audiovisual needs This chapter describes the methods of changing the various settings and setting the LCD panel AV Setting Overview The audio visual setting is divided into Audio Settings and System Settings Audio Settings screen AY Settings ESC Back tings a MEquatzer Wistasing Fom Re System Settings Ferres Woofer powert o t re or E HPF Wesource Level ows System Settings screen D Operation for Audio Settings gt Page 149 to 153 D Operation for System Settings gt Page 153 to 159 O When Pre Out the subwoofer controller set ting in System Settings menu is Full the Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub Woofer gt Setting the rear output and subwoofer con troller Page 158 When selecting the FM tuner as the source you cannot select Source Level How to Operate the Audio Set tings screen 1 Press the AV button The Navigation screen changes to the Audio source screen of any source 2 Touch AV Settings The AV Settings screen appears 3 Touch the item you want to change AY Settings ESC Back i t MEquatizer Boiasins AD BAL Sub FRO harria power o IRD Wier Fez Level Off oe 4 Change Setting E g Equalizer screen System Settings kaka Vocal Flat Customt Custom2 p Super Bass Powerful Natural O Touch ESC to return to the selected sour
328. ures may not be taken into con sideration For example if a street is open during the morning only but you arrive later it would be against the traffic regula tions so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traffic regulations The calculated route is one example of the route to your destination decided by the navi gation system whilst taking the type of streets or traffic regulations into account It is not nec essarily an optimum route In some cases you may not be able to set the streets you want to pass If you need to pass a certain street set the waypoint on that street e The route set by your navigation system may not use the streets known to local drivers such as small streets or special roads e Some route options may become the same route If waypoints are set only one route is calculated e lf the destination is too far there instances where the route canno way e During voice guidance turns and rom the freeway are announced points in rapid succession some announced e It is possible that guidance may d reeway and then back on again may be be set If you want to set a long distance route going across several areas set waypoints along the ntersections However if you pass intersections turns and other guide may not be irect you off a e In some cases the route may require y
329. urn the previous screen touch Back Changing the View Mode for the Navigation Map You can change the map display mode O You cannot perform this operation in Scroll mode 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch View Mode 2 Touch the type that you want to set gt How to Use the Map gt Page 39 Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night To improve the visibility of the map during the evening you can set the timing for changing the combination of the map color 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch Day Night Display to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting Automatic You can change the colors of a map between daytime and nighttime according to whether the vehicle lights are On or Off Day The map is always displayed with daytime col ors O To use this function with Automatic the Orange white lead of the navigation sys tem must be connected correctly g You can also change the brightness of the screen between daytime and nighttime with Dimmer D Operating the picture adjustment gt Page 160 Changing the Setting of Naviga tion Interruption Screen Set whether to automatically switch to the navi gation screen from the AV screen when your vehi cle approaches a guidance point such as an intersection while displaying a screen other than navigation 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch
330. using the built in DVD drive of the navigation unit This section describes those operations Selecting ROM as the source 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert the disc that you want to play into disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start O If the disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch ROM gt For details refer to Selecting a source gt Page 103 O While loading Checking disc is displayed g Also see Handling and Care of the Disc in the Hardware Manual and Detail Information for Playable Media for more cautions about handling each type of media Screen configuration 0 WOD 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Playback method indicator Shows which playback method has been selected 3 Folder indicator Shows the folder number and folder name cur rently playing When an ID3 tag has been encoded on the file the disc title will be shown instead of the folder name 4 Track indicator Shows the track number and file name of the track currently playing When an ID3 tag has been encoded on the file the track title will be shown instead of the file name 108 5 Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing only when an ID3 tag has been encoded on the MP3 ile 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the curren
331. ve Home Waypoint Home Waypoint To Home Registered Home As Waypoint Call Home Display Home Phone Home Dial Home Show Home Display Destination Destination Map Show Destination Map Operation Map Map Option Zoom Out Out Higher Zoom In In Lower Change Scale Scale Zoom 25 meters Scale 25meters 50 meters Scale 50meters 00 meters Scale 0Ometers 200 meters Scale 200meters 500 meters Scale 500meters kilometer Scale kilometer 2 kilometers Scale 2kilometers 5 kilometers Scale 5kilometers 0 kilometers Scale Okilometers 20 kilometers Scale 20kilometers 50 kilometers Scale 50kilometers 00 kilometers Scale 00kilometers 200 kilometers Scale 200kilometers 500 kilometers Scale 500kilometers 000 kilometers Scale 000kilometers 2000 kilometers Scale 2000kilometers 0 02 miles Scale 0 02miles 0 05 miles Scale 0 05miles 0 1 miles Scale 0 1miles 173 AW IAWN g 210A Y IM Wa SAg UOI EHIAeN ANO Buizeiado L4 TE Teh 21 be MM Pili Other voice command NAVI AV Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 17 0 25 miles Scale 0 25miles 0 5 miles Scale 0 5miles 0 75 miles Scale 0 75miles mile Scale mile 2 5 miles Scale 2 5miles 5 miles Scale 5miles 0 miles Scale Omiles 25 miles Scale 25miles 50 miles Scale 50miles 00 miles Scale 00miles 250 miles Scale 25
332. wing items List Only three proximate traffic events on your route are listed in this traffic list Back The message disappears and the map display reappears For the subsequent operations see Checking traffic congestion automatically D Checking traffic congestion automatically gt Page 71 Selecting traffic information to display There are different types of traffic information that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser vice and you can select which types will be incor porated and displayed on your navigation system 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Traffic Settings 2 Touch Displayed traffic information The names of the displayed traffic information items and a list of icons appears on the screen ER Traffic Settings Displayed traffic information oo gt 3 Touch the traffic information item to dis play A red check appears next to the selected traf fic information d Traffic Information Traftie Fiow M Warring Danger gt Narrow Road Lane Ciosod kes Accidents Road Works T stiopery Read O Traffic Flow includes not only whether or not to display the icon on the map but also whether or not to take the flow infor mation into account when rerouting O Touching ALL None selects or deselect all traffic information IAWN g 4 Touch OK The selected traffic information icon is added to the screen O The
333. y Search ML E cas station pe Bank a ATM Restaurant ME Fast Food Chains Ya BD Restaurant Chains a ie Man Displays a list of already registered POI short cuts 3 Touch Add Set Preferred POL Gas Station Bank amp ATM ihi Restaurant Fast Food Chains Add Delete OK Displays a POI category list 4 Toucha category Set Preferred POL m Gas Station 2i p ekaan TH Rostaurant ME Fast Food Chains ac Restaurant Chains V4 MB supermarkets 5 Touch the POI selection method Select All Gas Station Select Detail Mack Select All Selects all detailed categories that are included in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Select Detail Selects one of the detailed categories Touching a category adds that category to the shortcuts Deleting a POI shortcut 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search 2 Touch Set Touch Delete Displays a list of already registered POI short cuts Touch the category to be deleted A red check appears on the selected shortcut AII None A red check will appear or disappear on all registered categories Touch Delete Deletes the selected shortcut from the list 59 IAWN g uoneunsaq sno 0 jnoy e Buas EEESC LTO IAWN UOl eUI SEq INO 0 noy Le Bulag 60 Chapter 6 R
334. ylist You can delete tracks from the playlist O If you delete a track in the Albums group the track is deleted from the hard disk drive It is deleted from My Favorites group at the same time m m 4 5 Deleting the current track im If you delete the track the system does not delete the edited title information gt If you delete the tracks in My Mix playlist or My Favorite playlist they are only deleted from the playlist and not from the hard disk drive Enter the playlist edit mode gt Switching to the edit mode gt Page 123 Touch Delete Tracks Touch the tracks you want to delete When you touch a track a check mark appears indicating that it is selected To dese lect it touch the track again My B01 oriveit p i 02 Eye to eye B03 integration M os premer v wa E05 Britiance Touch gt to proceed to the next operation Select All Selects all tracks in the playlist All Off Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playl ist Touch Back Touch Yes you delete the track the track is deleted om the hard disk drive It is deleted from My Favorites group at the same time you delete the track the system does not delete the edited title information you delete the tracks in My Mix playlist or My Favorite playlist they are only deleted om the playlist and not from the hard disk drive
335. ylist can be edited 3 Touch Wi then touch Add to My Favorites Switching to the edit mode The item displayed in blue is the selected play list 1 Touch the playlist in the Albums My Favorites or Artists 4 Touch the playlist My Favorite 1 to My Favorite 4 or My Mix in which you want to register the tracks 2 Touch the track you want to edit The item displayed in blue is the track cur ently playing 5 Touch the tracks you want to register When you touch a track a check mark 3 Touch a appears indicating that it is selected To dese The system enters the track edit mode lect it touch the track again Touch to proceed to the next operation Drive it Orive it PIONEER TIME Please select playlist to add track to 1 My Mik 12 My Favorite 1 Rock Pop EAT Titer My Favorites N j My Favorite 2 Panny Fevers gt Operating the track edit mode gt LOS My Favorite 4 Page 124 4 Touch Back to return the previous screen 5 Touch to return to the previous level 10 00 a DT Sound vision soul P 01 Drive it PIONEER TIME 01 23 or beiven O2Eye to eye Select All f F 02 integr ation Selects all tracks in the playlist ias AII Off fli Brilianes Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist 6 Touch Back Areaqry o1snq e2unog Ay au Buisn AMES ell fe 7 Touch Yes K ithe The tracks are registered in the selected
336. your cellular phone in a format can not be received with navigation system Select just a suitable item format and then retry Disconnection has been made dur ing transfer for some reason Connect your cellular phone again and retry 195 ae Oooo NAVI AV Appendix Calibration failed Please refer to the owner s manual When The touch panel calibration has not been carried out with appropriate steps What to do Please read the instruction of touch panel calibration and retry Page 182 The HDD is not connected Failure of the built in hard disk drive as occurred such as internal elec cal problem or file system error s Consult your dealer Cannot use HDD There is no applicable program Failure of the built in hard disk drive as occurred such as internal elec rical problem or file system error Failure of the built in hard disk drive as occurred such as internal elec rical problem or file system error Consult your dealer Consult your dealer The HDD cannot be operated due to excessive heat Hard disk drive cannot run due to igh temperature Please move your vehicle to a safe place and turn the power off until the temperature goes down Park your vehicle to safe place turn the ignition switch off and wait until the temperature inside the vehicle drops Messages for Audio Functions When problems occur in the
337. ys stock prices gt Displaying stock prices gt Page 75 Pa Set My Favorites Displays the screen of storing browsable item for XM tuner D Storing browsable information gt Page 76 el My Favorites Displays information on your favorite brows able item for XM tuner gt Displaying favorite browsable Informa tion gt Page 76 Traffic On Route Displays a list of traffic information on the route D Checking traffic information on the route Page 70 A Traffic Events Displays a list of traffic events information D Checking traffic information Page 69 ZZ Day Night Display Switches Day Night Display setting D Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night gt Page 51 a Address Book Icon Display Switches Address Book Icon Display setting gt Address Book Icon gt Page 48 3 To finish the setting touch OK 49 5 suoneanBiyuop dew Buikypow PEEL be EE Displaying POI on the Map gt q z ao v 2 oO Modifying Map Configurations Displays icons for the surrounding facillities POI on the map 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Overlay POI 2 Touch Display to turn it On O If you do not want to display the POI icon on the map touch Display to turn it Off Even if Display is turned Off the POI selection setting is retained 3 Touch the category you wan
338. z a phone book entry gt Page 91 Deleting data 2 o Customizing the incoming call picture 1 Touch Information in the Navigation for a phone book entry menu and then touch Phone Menu a Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic 2 Touch Phone Book tures before creating a CD R RW 3 Touch Delete ouc elete gt Limitations for importing pictures gt The Delete from Phone Book screen Page 101 appears You can customize a picture for the phone book 4 Touch the entry you want to delete ecord Some pictures are already stored in the A red check mark appears next to the selected hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG for entry To cancel the selection touch the entry at pictures such as a picture from your digital again camera by using a CD R RW You can use pic egy aoe men ures by burning them onto a CD R RW with isei Piera ee oe your PC and insert that into the navigation sys 7 wre em E Here a method for changing the picture is described with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the navigation sys em e Mv IRLFRIEND lt T Treron Y ve ay uneue m MY FRIEND 2 91 gus 5D Touch Delete gt q z Chapter 9 Using Hands free Phoning 6 Touch Yes The data is deleted and the current location screen appears O To cancel the deletion touch No Editing the received call or dialed number history You can edit t

Pioneer AVIC-Z2 Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents